JP2023099861A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: After performing a bet operation, a slot machine 10 starts rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of operation of a start lever 41. The corresponding reels are stopped by operating stop switches 42 to 44, and a stop combination according to the lottery result may be stopped. When a specific opportunity occurs, setting is made so that a freeze performance is executed in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific opportunity has occurred. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where execution of the freeze performance is set, execution of the set freeze performance is canceled.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. a possible rewarding means; and
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first game state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result;
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state when the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, a specific effect that allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result is obtained is after the winning game in which the specific transition result is obtained and the second a means for performing a specific setting to be executed before transition to a game state;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. It is a figure which shows an example of a reach stitch. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for display mode transition. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table of the number of additional games. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows a process for a post-boarding alerting|reporting. It is a flow chart which shows processing for BB election. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze type allocation table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a freeze effect. 10 is a flow chart showing VB mode winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for freeze release. It is a flow chart which shows the press order notification processing for reach eyes. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game relating to the freeze effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a freeze release process in Modification 1. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game related to the notification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of releasing the freeze in modification 2; (a) is a flow chart showing a reel control process in the second embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing a reach stop determination process. (a) is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing settlement switch handling processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for freeze cancellation. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game relating to the freeze effect. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the 1st information and the 2nd information. (a) is a flow chart showing a reel control process in the third embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing a freeze release process. (a) is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing settlement switch handling processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the freeze return processing, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation example when the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, and (c) is the cancellation of the freeze effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of operation when not performed; It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game relating to the freeze effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining a freeze effect according to the fourth embodiment. (a) is a flow chart showing a BB winning process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a first special role process. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 6th freezing effect. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game when the continuous effect is executed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game when the continuous effect is executed.

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the valid line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol are arranged at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "black BAR", "watermelon", and "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" and "white" symbols on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st Replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the activated line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying the next game can be played without inserting medals are given to the first replaying winning to the eleventh replaying winning. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern, a "first replay" pattern, and a "black BAR". When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a “red bell” or “white bell” pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a “white BAR”, “LUCKY”, “red 7”, “white bell”, and “white bell” patterns. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" design, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" design, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" design, a "youth" design, and a "white bell" design. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power supply unit 91a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power of the main control device 101, the display control device 81, etc., which will be described later, is generated, and the generated operating power is used by the main control device 101, the display control device 81, etc. supply to

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power interruption state, and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power is cut off (external power is cut off). Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the driving voltage drops below 10 volts. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are provided via an input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 token is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

In the medal return process, a command indicating that the process is being executed or started is set and transmitted to the display control device 81 . As a result, the display control device 81 recognizes that the medal return process is being executed, and the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters such as "payment in progress", and the speaker 64 outputs a predetermined sound effect. . Such notification enables the player to recognize that the medal return process (settlement process) is being executed. The notification is continued until the medal return process is completed.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as a valid line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. do. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off or the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and The winning probability setting process is ended. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=32 to 52) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, 33rd minor winning flag, 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=33, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV so as not to win the first BB, second BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=34) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=35 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=50 and 51) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=52) is about 1 in 19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

In addition, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 53 to 56 in the normal game state lottery table. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result correspondence process, a process of determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results of steps S301 to S310, a process of notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. Further, in the lottery result handling process, a freeze lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled for a predetermined period is performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S311, a lottery result command is set in step S312. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S313, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th minor winning combination, the 32nd minor winning combination to the 35th minor winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In addition, in the stop information setting process of step S313, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the reach eye can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R when the first BB and the second BB are won. do. A reach eye is a symbol (stopped eye) that does not stop when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not won, and stops only when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. It is an outlier that does not correspond to the role. Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the patterns of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the reach numbers stop in the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is confirmed. Become. In this sense, the stop of the reach eye can be said to be the fixed effect of the first BB and the second BB.

Here, an example of reach stitches when only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the effective line will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 18, the numbers in parentheses indicate the symbol numbers. In this embodiment, a plurality of reach points including reach points A and reach points B are set.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the reach A is the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the sixth "lucky" symbol on the right reel 32R. A second replay symbol is a stop result in which the symbol is stopped on the activated line L4. When viewed from the player's point of view, the reach eye A is the fifth "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the eighth "RED 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” are arranged in a line rising to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the reach eye B is the 13th "young man" symbol on the left reel 32L, the 16th "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the 15th "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. A "young man" symbol is a stop result in which the player stops on the activated line L4.

In this embodiment, reach points are provided in addition to reach points A and reach points B, and the slot machine 10 is prepared with three or more types of reach points. That is, the ready-to-win numbers A and the ready-to-win numbers B are part of the ready-to-win numbers set as the stop symbol information. The information on the reach eye is stored in the reach eye information storage area of the ROM 105, and in step S313, the stop symbol information on the reach eye is set by referring to the information stored in the area.

Returning to the description of the lottery process in FIG. 16, in step S314, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S313, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols in the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols on the middle reel 32M in the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. Stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is an effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S314, after executing the section display first process in step S315, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery performed in the lottery result handling process of step S311. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol, and if they are equal, reel stop processing of stopping the rotation of the reel in step S410. I do. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, sandwich push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 21(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 9th "second replay" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower row, the symbol No. 4 "watermelon" is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Further, when the reach number is set as the stop symbol information, stop control processing is performed as follows. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of slides from when the stop operation is performed until the symbols stop can be set up to a maximum of four symbols. If the stop switch 42 is operated within the period from when the bell symbol reaches the base position to when the fifth symbol ``LUCKY'' arrives, the fifth symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L (display window 26L). The "LUCKY" pattern of stops. Also, if the stop switch 43 is operated within the period from when the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the base position on the middle reel 32M to when the 1st "youth" symbol reaches the base position. , the first "youth" symbol stops at the bottom of the middle reel 32M (display window 26M). Also, when the stop switch 44 is operated within the period from when the second "red bell" symbol reaches the base position on the right reel 32R to when the sixth "first replay" symbol reaches the base position. , the sixth "first replay symbol" stops at the bottom of the right reel 32R (display window 26R). From the above, as shown in FIG. 18A, the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the sixth "second bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. "Replay" symbols stop on the activated line L4, and the reach eye A stops.

If the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated within the above period, the reach stitch A is not stopped, and stop control is performed so as to stop the missing stitches according to the operation timing of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. - 特許庁That is, the reach eye A does not stop when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any operation timing, but only when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a specific operation timing.

Similarly, for the reach eye B shown in FIG. 18(b), the period from when the seventh "red bell" symbol reaches the base position to when the eleventh "first replay" symbol arrives on the left reel 32L. The stop switch 42 is operated within the period from when the 11th "cherry" symbol reaches the base position to when the 15th "red bell" symbol reaches the base position on the middle reel 32M. 43 is operated, and the stop switch 44 is operated within a period from when the 11th "first replay" symbol reaches the base position on the right reel 32R to when the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the base position. It will stop only when

Incidentally, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated within the above period, if their operation timings match the operation timings for the reach eyes other than the reach eyes A and the reach eyes B, the operation timings are not met. The corresponding reach stops. It should be noted that a losing eye that is stopped when operated at an operation timing that does not correspond to any reach eye is a losing eye that can be stopped even in the normal state (when not winning a bonus or being carried over).

Returning to the description of the reel control process in FIG. 19, when it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the freeze release process is performed in step S414. In the freeze release process, a process of releasing the freeze effect set in the freeze lottery process executed in the lottery result handling process of step S311 (FIG. 16) is performed. In the subsequent step S415, a winning result handling process is performed. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The freeze releasing process and the winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Select a lottery table.

FIG. 23 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 56 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23, if the winner is IV=1, the normal replay win is won, and if the winner is IV=2, the first promotion replay 1 wins, and the IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. That is, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small win, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 24(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to This relationship is not limited to the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same applies to other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Select a lottery table.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When the second RT state lottery table is compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 23), the point values PV of IV=1 to 10, 55, 56 are different, and the other index values IV are the same. point value PV is set. Here, the normal replay for the 2nd RT state with IV=55 is a normal replay combination that can be won when the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, and the reach replay with IV=56 is when the VB mode is won, which will be described later. It is a replay role that functions as a reach eye for

When the lottery table of FIG. 25 is used to determine whether or not the role is appropriate, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 54 is equal to each winning probability in the 1st RT state, and when IV=1, it is considered winning. The probability of winning is 0, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/10.5, and the winning when IV = 9 and 10 The probability of winning is about 1/7.00, the probability of winning when IV=55 is about 1/21.8, and the probability of winning when IV=56 is about 1/33.6. Become. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150.

That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established. Furthermore, in the second RT state, the eleventh re-game winning, which is the reach number in the VB mode without shifting the game state, is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412 in FIG. 19), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 and second promotion replay 1. Even when winning the second promotion replay 2 and the reach replay, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 24(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail. Also, when the reach replay is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the 11th re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning have not been established, the processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 26 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 25) in the point values PV of IV=1, 9 to 12, 55, 56, and other index values IV are set with the same point value PV. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=2-8, 13-54 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , 55 and 56, the probability of winning at IV=1 is about 1/13.2, and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 7.00 minutes. becomes 1 of The probability of winning when IV = 1 in the 3rd RT state (probability of winning in normal replay) is the probability of winning when IV = 55 in the 2nd RT state (probability of winning in normal replay) and IV = 56 It is the sum of the probability of winning at the time (winning probability of reach-th replay). The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150.

In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412 in FIG. 19), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, the winning mode is established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command. Set stop information to change .

FIG. 24(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". The falling line L4 is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=53 to 56. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=53) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=54 The probability of winning at the time of winning) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 2 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination is awarded. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ), there may be an SB state to transition to based on.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

When any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery is performed. Select a table.

FIG. 29 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-28 and 32-56, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=29-31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/1.11, and the probability of winning the second role in BB (IV = 30) is about 1/20.0, and the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB (probability of winning when IV=31) is about 1/20.0 becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

The winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are the winning probabilities common to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. In addition, the winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand, and the 3rd BB hand are common winning probabilities regardless of the timing of transition to the BB state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. The probability of winning the 3rd role in BB in the 1st BB based on 1 win in the special reply A and the 3rd role in BB in the 1 BB based on 1 win in the special reply AB is the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the lottery processing is performed with reference to the common BB state lottery table.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. In addition, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the second winning combination in the BB is won, the ninth re-game win is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

In the third winning combination of the BB, in which the 9th replay winning prize and the 10th replay winning prize are possible, which replay winning prize is established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation is performed, if all of them can win a prize, stop drive control is performed so that the replay with a smaller number of slips wins a prize. More specifically, the combination of symbols for winning the ninth replay and tenth replay is common to both the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol for both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, the left reel 32L is different. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the ninth replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the tenth replay are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the upper row, the ninth replay is performed. Both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol with a small number of slips on the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game win can be established instead of the tenth re-game win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the twelfth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the thirteenth "youth The ninth re-game is set so that the ninth re-game is easier to win than the tenth re-game. In other words, if the 10th replay is to be won, the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper row of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and if it is other timing, the ninth regame winning will be established.

Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the 1st winning combination is won in the BB, and if the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination, and the 40th minor winning combination are established, 9 medals are paid out. . Also, when the second combination is won during BB, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even when the third combination during BB is won, the ninth re-game winning is established in most cases. In other words, in the BB state, either the bell winning such as the first small winning combination or the replay winning such as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but a replay is given, and the next game can be played without medals. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and none of the BB winnings have been established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game, resulting in a so-called carry-over state, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110 in FIG. 14).

Here, in the present embodiment, winning other bonuses is restricted in the game played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV=32 to 49 is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 32 to 49 or a double combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the normal game state is entered. By the way, when shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state, if the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won and a replay is granted, the remaining payout number counter is not decremented. In other words, the number of times the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won in the BB state does not affect the number of medals that can be expected in the BB state.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal game state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 24(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 24 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 24(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 24(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 24(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. (so-called chance zone), attack mode (so-called ART state, including additional specialized zone), VB mode (so-called pseudo-bonus, including additional specialized zone), and BB mode are managed by main controller 101. It's like

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode or the challenge mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode may be performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the attack mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the challenge mode is won, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is shifted to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In challenge mode, a lottery for transition to attack mode is held. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to attack mode When the lottery is won, the challenge mode is transitioned to the attack mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. Challenge mode does not switch to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when winning the replay of the pressing order, so the transition to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state is rare, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The attack mode consists of 4 attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to VB mode. are more likely to migrate. When the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the attack mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode shifts to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , 3rd attack mode, and 4th attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins, the player operates the stop switches 42 in the notified order of operation. When ∼44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 24(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If so, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified. Therefore, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and return from the attack mode to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the challenge mode are compared, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

In addition, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode differs in each attack mode. And when it transfers to attack mode from normal mode or challenge mode, it transfers to 1st attack mode fundamentally. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode are held. When the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode shifts to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to the attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from the first attack mode to the second attack mode to the third attack mode to the fourth attack mode, thereby increasing the probability of transition to the VB mode. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, and an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag has already been set before the current game, and whether or not the current game is the carryover state of the first BB or the second BB.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, processing for switching the display mode in steps S702 to S710 and the like are executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 and the current state is in the carryover state, processing for switching to the display mode, etc. is not performed. That is, during the bonus carry-over state, the execution of the process for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is restricted.

Specifically, when a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the attack mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means the normal game state or the first RT state and the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the attack mode. Further, in the first special combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the challenge mode is not in progress means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S803, a challenge mode table is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. In the normal-time table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set differently depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. It is

As shown in FIG. 37, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlapping 1, weak. Cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special reply A duplication 1, special reply A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (hereinafter collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition opportunities are set so that there is a set difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that setting 1 has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability. . By the way, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, strong watermelon duplication 2, weak watermelon duplication 2, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 2, middle bell duplication 2, special reply AB duplication 1, special reply AB duplication 2, etc. Even for the non-trigger role for which each mode transition lottery is not performed, there is a setting difference in the winning probability.

Incidentally, it is optional whether or not to provide a setting difference for the winning probabilities of the above-mentioned shift opportunity and non-opportunity. For example, regarding the winning probability of the transition trigger role, the set point value PV may be common regardless of the set value, and the transition rate of each mode transition may be common regardless of the set value. .

In the lottery table for transition to the attack mode acquired in steps S802 and S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, when the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, the normal table has a 45% probability of winning the attack mode transition lottery, while the challenge mode table has a 90% probability. The lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be more likely to be won in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Further, when the transition trigger combination is Strong Cherry, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to attack mode is higher in both the normal table and the challenge mode table than when the transition trigger combination is Weak Cherry, It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the lottery for transition to the attack mode.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through a special zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games obtained by adding the number of games added in the special zone to the initial number of games of 50. be. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode.

A lottery for transition to the super attack mode is executed when a lottery for transition to the attack mode is won (when a lottery for transition to the attack mode is won in step S804). It is done based on the transition lottery table for the set super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 38, the transition lottery table for the super attack mode shows that winning the attack mode during the challenge mode wins the transition lottery to the super attack mode more than winning the attack mode during the normal mode. It is set to make it easier to play, and the superiority of the challenge mode is guaranteed.

For example, during the normal mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the attack mode triggered by a strong watermelon is 60%, and 5% of those who win the transition lottery win the super attack mode. When a strong watermelon is won in the normal mode, 57% shift to the attack mode, and 3% shift to the super attack mode. On the other hand, during the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the attack mode with the strong watermelon as a trigger is 50%, and 50% of those who win the lottery to transition to the super attack mode. 25% of the cases where a strong watermelon is won in the challenge mode shift to the attack mode, and 25% shift to the super attack mode, and the shift rate to the super attack mode is higher than that of the normal mode. Furthermore, the winning probability of the lottery to transition to the super attack mode differs depending on the transition trigger role. Although it is common to watermelon (5% winning probability), in the challenge mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be higher for strong watermelon than for strong cherry.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, then in step S807 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 is executed, processing of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode wins, the attack mode win flag is set, and part of them (when the super attack mode wins) sets the specialized zone win flag.

In the subsequent step S809, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag (bonus winning flag) is set. If it is determined that the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to steps S810 to S813. In steps S810 to S813, processing for setting the portent mode is performed. Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is likely to occur. will be announced. The Omen Mode lasts from 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the Omen Mode continues to play varies depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc. won and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. In addition, if attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus will be performed after the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. A notification will be made of what happened. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S810, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 39, the number of precursor games table is set so that the number of precursor games to be selected differs depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus is won at the same time. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the attack mode is won, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 games are selected. Games ~ 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 10%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%. 11-20 games are selected at 50% and 21-32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the winning of the attack mode will be announced in a relatively short number of games from the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether the bonus is simultaneously won. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when winning the super attack mode (attack mode with an additional specialized zone) in the normal mode, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games will be selected at 70%, and 6 games to 10 games will be selected. Games are selected at 30%. On the other hand, when the bonus is simultaneously won at the time of winning the super attack mode in the normal mode, the 1st to 5th games are not selected, the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%, and the 11th to 20th games are selected. Games are selected at 30% and games 21-32 are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and when the bonus is not simultaneously won. Then, the winning of the super attack mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the super attack mode. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the precursor game number regardless of whether the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

It should be noted that the number of predictive games that are likely to be selected may be varied depending on the type of the duplicate combination when winning simultaneously with the bonus. For example, a combination of replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Rep A Duplication 1 and Special Rep A Duplication 2, is a smaller combination such as Strong Cherry Duplication 1 and Weak Cherry Duplication 1 (Strong Cherry, It may be configured such that a long omen mode is more likely to be selected than overlapping combination of weak cherry, etc.) and bonus, or vice versa.

In step S811, a lottery process for the number of games in the current portent mode is performed based on the portent game number table acquired in step S810 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Then, in step S812, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of the winning of the transition lottery for the attack mode or the like is performed.

In step S813, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes information on the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode and game state to be changed after the portent mode) and the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail.

When it is determined in step S809 that the bonus winning flag is set, or after the processing of step S813 is executed, the process proceeds to step S814 to execute BB winning processing for reporting BB winning. In the BB winning process, setting processing of the number of precursor games for notifying BB winning, freeze lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute the freeze effect, and setting processing in the case of executing the freeze effect are performed. . The BB winning process will be described later in detail. After execution of step S814, the first special combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for challenge mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set according to the type of transition opportunity (FIG. 38). For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S815 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S815, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether the challenge mode is on or not.

In step S816, it is determined whether or not the player wins the challenge mode based on the result of processing in step S815. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S817 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the game mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S818, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

In the subsequent step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S814 for BB winning, and if the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820.

In steps S820 to S823, setting processing for the precursor mode is performed in the same manner as in steps S810 to S813. That is, a precursor game number table is acquired in step S820, a precursor game number lottery process is performed in step S821, the precursor game number is set in step S822, and a precursor command is set in step S823.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the predictive game number table obtained in step S820, when the challenge mode alone is won, games 1 to 5 are selected at 90%, and games 6 to 10 are selected at 10%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, games 1 to 5 are selected at 20%, games 6 to 10 are selected at 30%, and games 11 to 20 are selected at 50%. be done. That is, even when the challenge mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if the bonus is not won at the same time, and if the bonus is not won at the same time, , the winning of the challenge mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the challenge mode.

In addition to the number of omen games, regardless of whether the bonus is won at the same time, the number of omen games that are longer in attack mode than in challenge mode is likely to be selected, and the omen game that is longer in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easily selected, and if a display mode advantageous to the player is won, a long predictive game number is likely to be selected. In addition, when the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of omen games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the omen mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus and the bonus are won at the same time. do. In addition, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of premonition games of 20 or less is selected in the challenge mode and the bonus at the same time. In simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is also selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, bonus+attack mode or super attack mode is determined. In this way, the enjoyment of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition trigger role is won, there is a case where the game is not won in the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like, or when a non-trigger role is won, the game may shift to the pseudo omen mode. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, the occurrence of the winning suggestion effect frequently over 21 games or more determines that the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode that has been shifted to is the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S817 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S824 to S827 processing for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S824, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S825, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the additional number of games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S825, the value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The challenge mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the number of extra games increases according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, for example, 2 to 20 games in the challenge mode are added to the strong cherry, and the average number of added games is 15 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 30 games are added, and the average number of games added is 10 games. The average value (the number of games added to the expectation) is set so that the number of games of strong cherries is larger.

In step S826, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S825. Perform addition processing. Then, in step S827, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) for the add-on. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the add command will be described in detail later, but in the display control device 81, based on the reception of the add command, the add command as notification of the information contained in these add commands is displayed. Notification (additional production) is performed.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S824, the process proceeds to step S828. At step S828, a challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the process proceeds to step S814. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added when the bonus ends. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S705, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. If it is not in the bonus state, or if the determination in step S706 is affirmative, then in step S709, the third special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means that the player is in the second RT state and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be shifted to the VB mode or the additional special zone. It should be noted that the additional specialized zone indicates a state in which the number of continuous games in the attack zone is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special combination process, a lottery for promotion of the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing for grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first to fourth attack modes are provided, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode the rank of the current attack mode is.

At step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped at step S901 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the probability of transition to VB mode is different as a whole, and the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. , so that the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode, so that the fourth attack mode is more likely to enter the VB mode than the third attack mode. is set so that the transition probability of

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when a VB mode shift lottery is performed with a double combination as a bonus as a shift trigger, the VB mode shift lottery is not won. In other words, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are prevented from being duplicated as much as possible, so that the advantages of overlapping roles with these bonuses are not too high.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S908, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn by lottery in step S907, and the number of precursor games is set in step S908. As shown in FIG. 39, in the predictive game number table obtained in step S906, 1st to 5th games are selected at 80% and 6th to 10th games are selected when the attack mode is not in the special zone. Selected at 10%. On the other hand, if the player is in the additional specialized zone, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games. Therefore, when the VB mode is won in the special addition zone, the winning is notified in the next game.

After execution of step S908, the process advances to step S909 to execute VB mode winning processing for reporting VB mode winning. In the VB mode winning process, a freeze lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect when informing of the VB mode win, a setting process for executing the freeze effect, and the like are performed. The VB winning process will be described later in detail. After execution of step S909, the second special combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for increasing the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . A plurality of tables for the promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and Three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation staying in the 4th attack mode) is provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Further, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this processing, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten to a rank flag one level higher than the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank.

Thereafter, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The elevate command contains information about the attack mode to elevate to. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set according to the rank of the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for the attack mode is performed with a background color according to the rank of the destination of the promotion.

When it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery is not won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S914 to S921.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, tables for attack mode additional lottery are acquired from various table storage areas 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . As shown in FIG. 41, the attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is set so that the push order bell or the push order replay will also trigger the lottery. As shown in FIG. 37, a common point value PV is set for the push order bell and the push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") regardless of the set value, which is set as the winning probability. There is no difference. Also, the odds of winning the lottery for adding the number of games, which is triggered by the winning order, and the number of games to add to the number of games at the time of winning are set so that there is no setting difference. In other words, there is no setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the pushing order. In the following explanation, the combination that triggers the lottery related to the instruction function, including the above-mentioned shift trigger combination, is also referred to as a special combination. It is optional whether or not to provide a setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the winning combination, and the setting difference may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific combinations, the odds of winning the number-of-games addition lottery in the attack mode are set to be lower for the winning combination than for the transitional combination. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the attack mode will be increased in the case where the transition opportunity role appears as a lottery result of each game, rather than in the case where the winning role appears. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the pushing order combination has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the winning combination as an additional opportunity combination and increase the degree of surprise when an additional combination occurs. Moreover, the chances of these additional performances based on the order being played can actually occur during the attack mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games, 50, is played two or three times, it will occur once). appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate an increase triggered by the above-described unexpected push-up.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in attack mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, the attack mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherry, 20 to 200 games are added in the attack mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, attack mode continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform addition processing. In the subsequent step S919, an addition notification process is performed for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games. Then, in step S920, the process of setting the addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The additional notification processing will be described later in detail.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. That is, like the game number addition notification in the challenge mode, the game for which the addition notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S915 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role during the attack mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a special zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 38, the specialized zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of the transition opportunity role among the specific roles. As already explained, among the transition trigger roles, the bonus combination is not won in the VB mode transition lottery. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the lottery for adding the number of games is always won (100% probability of winning). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery will not be performed with the overlapping roles with these bonuses as a trigger, and the special zone transfer lottery will be at the time of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry that does not overlap with the bonus, It is set so that the player can win the lottery for transition to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games when the player does not win the lottery. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, in the special zone transfer lottery based on the strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transfer lottery based on the weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%.

In step S923, based on the processing result of step S922, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If not won, the second special combination processing is terminated as it is. When winning, in step S924, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S925, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S926, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S927, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S928, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S925 to S927 are similar to the processes of steps S906 to S908, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S923 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in attack mode, and the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, the second special role processing is terminated. .

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S709 of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special winning process is performed means the state of the third RT or the state of the second RT and winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed.

That is, in step S1001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, in step S1006 processing for addition notification is performed, and in step S1007 processing for setting the addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1003 to S1007 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S920. Note that the number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S917 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if the special combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S922, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 38). The processing of steps S1010 to S1015 is the same as the processing of steps S923 to S928. Also, when it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1008, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result corresponding process in FIG. 32, after execution of step S704, step S707 or step S709, or when affirmative determination is made in step S708, the process proceeds to step S710, and the result of this lottery process is replayed in order of pushing. It is determined whether or not the pushing order of the pushing order bell has been won. In the case of winning the pushing first hand, the pushing first hand process is executed in step S711. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S710, or after the process of step S711 is executed, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the special zone winning flag is set based on winning the transition lottery to super attack mode or the transition lottery to the special zone, the transition to the special zone is possible. This is a flag that is set when it occurs (when the 7th regame win is established). If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S713. When a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1101, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1102, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the subsequent step S1103, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1104, the addition notification processing is executed, and in step S1105, after setting the addition command, the special zone processing ends. The processing of steps S1102 to S1105 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S1102 than in the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S917 (FIG. 40). In addition, in the special zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of games in the attack mode is always added (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, on the condition that the carryover state is not in effect, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode, or the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. etc. are performed. In other words, even if a specific combination is won, during the carry-over state, the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed. its implementation is restricted. When the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in a prize-winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1203, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the bonus has been won. Such notification will be described later in detail.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like are won at the same time, the attack mode or the like is announced at the end of the bonus announced in step S1203. The processing related to such winning notification will be described in detail later, but when winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with bonus winning notification, winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1203. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1205. Then, in step S1206, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S<b>1207 , a challenge mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1208, the count of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1208, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1204 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1210. Then, in step S1211, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The notification flag for attack is a flag for shifting the game state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the attack mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1212, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the attack mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1212, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in super attack mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in attack mode. Therefore, in step S1212, it is preferable to set the attack mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether or not it is the super attack mode. The mode of notification of winning in the attack mode and the mode of notification of winning in the super attack mode may be different as long as the player can distinguish between them. It is preferable that the aspect is more flashy than the aspect of winning notification in the attack mode.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the form of notification of winning is made common between the attack mode and the super attack mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of the winning has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode between the attack mode winning notification game and the start notification game, and the attack mode winning is achieved. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1209 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1214. Then, in step S1215, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1216, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1216, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1217. In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1218, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1219, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1219 is executed, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1220, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the mode change notification process is terminated.

That is, of the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is activated based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. be started. On the other hand, for the attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, only the notification of winning the attack mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. The attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started even if the number of precursor games becomes 0. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the 4th and 5th replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for transition to the attack mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for transitioning the game state, It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S711) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 44, the pushing process executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1301 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the attack mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 42). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1303, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the third re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 24(a)). After that, in step S1304, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process ends. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1303, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning prize is notified, basically, the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed via the sign mode. It is assumed that it will be after the attack mode has been completed and before the transition to attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1305 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1307, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 24(b)). After that, in step S1308, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the move to the attack mode lottery is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the second. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for attack is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the third re-game winning, and the third re-game winning is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the attack mode is not won and the game moves to the second RT state by chance, the game will quickly move to the first RT state after that.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. A positive determination in step S1309 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not the VB notification flag or special zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 42). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 42). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1312, processing for notification of the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation order corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 24(b)). After that, in step S1313, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1311, then in step S1307 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1308 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the attack mode is in progress, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the attack is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1309, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. An affirmative determination in step S1314 means that any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for attack is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1317, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth replays, the operation order corresponding to the seventh replay win is reported (see FIG. 24(c)). After that, in step S1318, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1315, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1316, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed in step S1303, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1304. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case where BAR replay 1 is won without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the attack mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning prize is performed, and if the attack mode is not in progress. The pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1314, it is determined in step S1319 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S1320 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1321, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 20). After that, in step S1322, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. Further, if the determination in step S1320 is affirmative, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the process for informing the pushing order. If a negative determination is made in step S1319, a reach eye push order notification process is executed in step S1323, and then the main push order process is terminated. The push order notification process for the reach eye will be described later in detail.

Note that in the case where the challenge mode is configured to perform at least a predetermined number of push order notifications (once), it is determined in steps S1302 and S1320 whether or not the predetermined number of push order notifications have been executed during the challenge mode. should be configured to perform If a negative determination is made in this determination, the predetermined number of times is counted, and the processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S1303 and S1321 may be performed.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S415) in the reel control process (FIG. 19). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1401, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, etc. are counted. In the subsequent step S1402, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing post-addition notification, which is one notification mode of the addition notification. The post-loading notification process will be described later in detail.

In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third replay winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 22), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set means the case where the third replay win is established without the condition for shifting to the attack mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to an RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, when it is determined in step S1405 that the attack mode flag has been set, in addition to being in the attack mode, the case is in the VB mode or in the specialized zone. .

At step S1405, if the attack mode flag is set, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1406 to S1409.

That is, in step S1406, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1407, the attack mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1408, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode.

After performing the processing of step S1408, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set in step S1409. A positive determination in step S1409 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1410, the additional special zone starts. (steps S1419 to S1421). The processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1403 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 22), the processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1412, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth and fifth regame wins are established without winning the VB mode transfer lottery. In this case, the process for starting the VB mode is not performed. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag has not been set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1414 to S1416.

That is, in step S1414, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1415, a VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1416, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1416, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. It should be noted that the case where the 7th re-game winning has been established means that BAR Replay 1 has been won and the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game winning. There is (Fig. 24(c)).

If the seventh replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1418 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1419 to S1421. As already described, when the super attack mode is started, even if affirmative determination is made in step S1409 and the process of step S1410 is performed, the process of steps S1419 to S1421 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1419, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1420 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1421, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1421, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1418, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 22) based on the winning of the combination (3rd to 5th replays) corresponding to shifting the game state. conduct. This is to avoid the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, the shift to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the attack mode or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, the display mode transition is not performed when the game state transitions due to, for example, a second regame win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition result. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1401 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, in the 1-bet and 2-bet games, the number of games in the omen mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the like are not counted. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the game to end this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode, VB mode, or additional special zone. If the determination in step S1503 is affirmative, the process advances to step S1504 to clear the display mode flags of the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag, and then the number of games management process ends. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode, etc., is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1504, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1504, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an attack mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when the bonus is won in the special zone, the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. If the challenge mode, attack mode, etc., and the bonus are simultaneously won and the challenge mode winning flag, attack mode winning flag, etc. are set, these winning flags, etc. are not cleared in step S1504. Therefore, if the player wins the challenge mode or the like and the bonus at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502 or step S1503, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1506. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1505 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1506 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1507 to S1529. .

That is, in step S1507, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1508 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1510, and a challenge mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1511. Upon receiving the challenge mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1511, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in attack mode, the process advances to step S1513 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in attack mode. That is, in the case of transitioning to the specialized zone at the start of the attack mode like in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1513. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1526 to S1529. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the zone is not a special zone, in step S1514, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the attack mode continuation game count. Then, in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1516, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1517. After that, in step S1518, an attack mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1518, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1512 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1519. In step S1519, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1520 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If the zone is not the special zone for addition, the VB mode continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1521. Then, in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1523, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1524. After that, in step S1525, a VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1525, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1520 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1526. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1513 that the zone is a specialized zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1526. In step S1526, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1527, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S15278, and the specialized zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1529. Upon receiving the special zone end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will end in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1529, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1519 or step S1527, the game count management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed, and an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st BB hand is established with a high probability, and the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are partially established (FIG. 29). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st minor role is mainly won, and a predetermined number of medals (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are replayed in the 9th replay. This is a replay of the 10th replay, and medals are not paid out even if a prize is established. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 2 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1601 is a process of determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1601 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1602 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. When a negative determination is made in step S1601, or after the processing of step S1602 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0 in step S1603. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1604, in steps S1605 to S1619, processing for notification of winning such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1605, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1606, the number of precursor games is set in step S1607, and the precursor command is set in step S1608.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursory games in step S1606, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursory games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1607, the number of premonitory games of 0 games is always set, and winning information such as attack mode is performed in the next game after the bonus end game. After executing the process of step S1608, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1605, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1609, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the portent mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the premonition game is performed, and the winning of the challenge mode and the VB mode is announced.

In addition, when the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, it is when the bonus is won at the same time as the attack mode or challenge mode, or when the winning of the attack mode or challenge mode etc. is announced. It is a case where the bonus is won during the omen mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won during the attack mode, or during the premonitory mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game after winning the VB mode because the 0 game premonition mode is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, an attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1612, an attack mode game addition process is performed in step S1613, and an addition notification process is performed in step S1614. , and an addition command is set in step S1615. The processes of steps S1612 to S1615 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S920. After executing the process of step S1615, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1611, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1617, the challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1618, and an addition command is set in step S1619. . The processes of steps S1617 to S1619 are the same as the processes of steps S825 to S827. If a negative determination is made in step S1616, or if the process of step S1619 has been executed, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is used when the player wins a lottery to switch to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode, or when the player wins the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode at the same time. Lights up when winning the bonus (1st BB) to be obtained. In addition, when the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB is completed and the normal mode is entered (excluding the case where the attack mode is entered again after passing through the sign mode, etc.), the lights are turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (attack mode or super attack mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player to facilitate winning in an advantageous manner, and the transition lottery to the navigation state can be performed. A section including a chance state (challenge mode or 1BB) that makes it easier to win, or a winning state (winning mode) that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. is an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section, which is not the advantageous section, to clearly indicate whether it is an advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for indicating.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game that starts a game in which a game result (such as a special hand such as a strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section will be reached. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result that triggered the advantageous interval is established, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a dropout, the game in which the game result is won is played. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. In other words, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S315 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it means that the player has won a lottery for transition to the attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode as an advantageous section, or is in any of these modes. A case is shown. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode Or when you win the lottery for transition to super attack mode. As already explained, in the first special combination process (FIG. 33), when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode or super attack mode is won. If so, the attack mode win flag is set. In step S1702, if none of the flags is set, the section display first processing is terminated.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1703 to start displaying the section indicator by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S1703, in step S1704, the process of starting to measure the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed. The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is determined by measuring the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1704, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous interval.

In the subsequent step S1705, a process of starting to measure the number of medals obtained (difference number) in the advantageous section is executed. The number of difference is obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals. In step S1705, the difference number MY is set to 0, which is the initial value. After execution of step S1705, the section display first process ends.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1706 processing is performed to continue the display during the advantageous section, and then this first section display processing is performed. exit. Specifically, in step S1706, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process (FIG. 19). (processing for canceling freeze) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (processing corresponding to winning result) are executed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being lit. If it is turned off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated. If it is during lighting display, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval, and counts the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

In the subsequent step S1803, a process of updating the difference number in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, when there is a payout of medals based on the establishment of a winning combination, the difference (number of payouts - number of bets) between the number of payouts and the number of medals bet (bet number) in the game is calculated, The calculated value is added to the difference number MY provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 to update the difference number MY. On the other hand, when there is no payout of medals based on the establishment of a winning combination, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference number MY in the counter area 106e to update the difference number MY.

After executing the process of step S1803, in step S1804, it is determined whether or not at least one of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG (the number of games played in the advantageous interval) and the difference number MY has reached a predetermined upper limit value. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section (the number of games played in the advantageous section) has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), and the difference number MY is the predetermined upper limit number ( For example, 2400 sheets) is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the processing of steps S1805 to S1807 is executed to end the advantageous section. At step S1805, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the difference number MY are each cleared to 0, and at step S1806, processing for turning off the eighth display segment N8 is performed as end processing for displaying the section indicator. Then, after performing data initialization processing in step S1807, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of resetting the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval to their initial values. For example, if the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or if the VB mode winning flag is set during the attack mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization processing. clears these winning flags. Also, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

The condition for ending the advantageous interval is not limited to the above. The number MY may be excluded from the fulfillment element of the end condition, and the advantageous interval game number AG may be established when the number of games AG reaches the upper limit number of games, or vice versa.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if neither the number of games in the advantageous interval AG nor the difference number MY has reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S1808 to determine whether or not the advantageous interval has ended. That is, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set. In the following step S1809, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. A positive determination in both steps S1808 and S1809 means that the advantageous interval ends before at least one of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval and the number of difference MY reaches the upper limit value. , the number of advantageous section games AG and the difference number MY are each cleared to 0, processing for ending the display of the section display is performed in step S1806, data initialization processing is performed in step S1807, and then section display No. 2 Finish the process. If a negative determination is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, it is assumed that the current section is still in an advantageous section, and the second section display processing ends. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2002. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or if the process of step S2002 has been executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that a betting operation has been performed. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like in the processing (FIG. 42). In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2004.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2004 has been executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is the lottery result command set in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 16). , Precursor commands and additional commands set in the 1st to 3rd special combination processing (Fig. 33 to 35), pushing order notification commands set in the pushing order processing (Fig. 44), and execution of freeze effect There is a freeze stock command, which will be described later, which is output when set. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2006.

If a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the newly received command is a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2008, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or if the processing of step S2008 has been executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 19). In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, special There are a zone end command, a freeze release command that is output when the execution of the freeze effect is released, and the like, which will be described later. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2010.

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, setting effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control device 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. Note that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 57 and 62 to 68. FIG.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, in step S2102, a process of setting a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the characters "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) that suggests the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Grab the attack mode!" in a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the attack mode win notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When an attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S2104, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack mode confirmed". In addition, in the attack mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2106, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2108, a process of setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the text "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the specialized zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2110, processing for setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After any one of steps S2102, S2104, S2106, S2108 and S2110 is executed, or when a negative determination is made at S2109, at S2111, other effects at the time of betting are set. , the effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2111, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S2102, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S2201, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S2202, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2203, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2303, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of falling replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2305 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then finish the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the replays are not falling replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2106 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2110, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 are notified that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2307, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined.

If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2308, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2305 to notify the pressing order for the first re-game winning, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2306 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2310 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2311, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the seventh regame winning is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2305 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2309 that it is not BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2313, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2312, the processes of steps S2314 to S2316 are executed, and then the pressing order notification process ends. The processing of steps S2314 to S2316 will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 53), if it is determined in step S2202 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2205. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, or after the processing of step S2203 or step S2205 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2207, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2402, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by a process (additional notification process) on the main controller 101 side, which will be described later. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2402 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. If the current game does not include the addition notification, the processing for setting the addition effect is terminated as it is.

If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2405, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. In step S2405, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is in the stop OFF operation. When it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2407, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Further, in step S2407, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2406, in step S2408, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is operated to stop and turn OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2408, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2405, step S2407 or step S2408, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the time of start (FIG. 53), when the addition command is not received in step S2206, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S2208. Then, in step S2209, a continuous effect setting process is executed, and then in step S2210, after setting other start effects, the start time effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2210, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like are performed.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2008 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2502 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2504, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made in which the first reel shown in FIG. 43(a) is to be operated. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 43(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed as a stop target shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 43(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2505 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is finished.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the process advances to step S2506 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2507 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2508, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "challenge mode end". In addition, in the challenge mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "More diligence!" in a loud male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the attack mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the attack mode start command is included, in step S2604, processing for setting the attack mode start effect is performed. In the attack mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start rendering, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display portion 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.2" as promotion effect. Also, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the character display "Attack mode!! Ver.3" is displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the character display is "Attack mode!! Ver.4". display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the attack mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode end command is included, in step S2606, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), in the attack mode ending effect, the characters "Attack mode END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) is displayed. ), and the total number of payouts for this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2605, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode start command is included, in step S2608, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 VICTORY!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2607, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, then in step S2612 processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2611, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2614, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2616, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2615, it is determined in step S2617 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2618, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the attack mode, the suitability of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2602, S2604, S2606, S2608, S2612, S2614, S2616 and S2618, or after making a negative determination in S2617, the process proceeds to steps S2609 and S2619. move on. In steps S2609 and S2619, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S2207 in the process of setting the effect at the start. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 55), when the timing of occurrence of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in steps S2610 and S2620, after setting other stop effect, the present effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2610 and S2620, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination. , and control so that the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game.

<Bonus effect setting process>
First, the effect setting processing during bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2208 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 53).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2701 means that the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2702, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S2703, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S2702 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the processing of step S2703 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning to such an extent that the player can identify them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends five minutes after the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Further, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on the 1st BB win and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB win can be identified, the game result that triggered the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win can be identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1BB winning, for example, the bonus effect is distinguished between the case of winning the 1BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply A and the case of winning the first BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply AB. Impossible or difficult to identify, more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. In addition, the same applies to the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB winning. It is difficult, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG.

In the continuous production, for example, a warrior character holding a firearm is displayed as the main character, and one to three enemy characters are displayed, and a battle between the two characters unfolds. In the first game in which continuous effects are executed, characters such as "Defeat the enemy!" . At that time, the degree of expectation of victory is suggested by the number of enemy characters. The less the number of enemy characters, the higher the expectation of victory.

In the second game in which the continuous effect is executed, an image is displayed in which the main character starts attacking the enemy character. After the image of the attack is displayed, the result is displayed as to whether or not the attack was successful in defeating the enemy character. Similarly, in the third game, an image of the main character attacking is displayed, and then the result is displayed as to whether or not the enemy character has been defeated. FIGS. 67(b) and 67(c) exemplify cases in which one enemy character is defeated in each game. In some cases, an image of defeating a plurality of enemy characters with an attack (one game) is displayed.

Then, in the final game of the continuous production, victory or defeat is notified. As shown in FIG. 68(b1), when all the enemy characters are defeated, the main character wins, and as shown in FIG. A victory video is displayed with a roar. At this time, the speaker 64 outputs a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "I did it!") in synchronization with the display of the victory image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(c1), if at least one enemy character survives and all the enemy characters cannot be defeated, the main character is defeated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), for example, a character display of "LOSE" is displayed together with a defeat image in which the main character is lying down. At this time, the speaker 64 outputs a corresponding sound effect (for example, "tohoho" in a male voice) in synchronization with the display of the defeat image.

FIG. 67 exemplifies the case where the continuous effect is executed over 4 games, but the continuous effect may end after 2 games or 3 games. In each game from the second game onward, when the continuous effect is continued in the next game, the result of whether or not the enemy character has been defeated is displayed together with a character display such as "Continue". Notification that the continuous production will continue is performed. By the way, when the continuous effect ends in two games, the notification of continuation is not performed in the second game, and after the attack image is displayed, the victory image of FIGS. The defeat image of (c2) is displayed. The continuous effect is set so that the probability of winning increases as the number of continuous games increases, and the player is strongly interested in not only whether the main character wins but also whether the continuous effect continues. It is configured so that you can see the performance by bringing it closer.

Hereinafter, as the processing related to the above-described continuous effect, the process for notifying the transition timing role (step S2205) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2209) in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 53) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
60, first, in step S2801, in the transition opportunity notification process, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the effect of the current game is executed. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 66(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like.

In subsequent step S2802, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2801 has been won. If the game has been won, in step S2803, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, the 32nd minor symbol to the 35th minor symbol, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L will also be referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode (so-called DDT hitting method or small win recovery hitting method) that does not cause any omissions. Each operation mode in which the above-mentioned dropout occurs is also referred to as a non-specific operation mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S2803, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is not possible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Further, the chance effect is not necessarily generated in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but is generated on the condition that the player wins in the chance effect lottery process (step S2801). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, or if the process of step S2803 has been performed, the process advances to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the command at the start of this time. If no portent command is included, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or addition of the number of continuous games If neither the lottery nor the bonus has been won, in step S2807, pseudo-prediction mode lottery processing is executed. The pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the omen mode, but in the omen mode, based on the completion of the number of omen games, advantageous results for the player (such as winning the challenge mode) are reported. The pseudo sign mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo sign games.

In step S2807, a table for pseudo portent mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo portent mode. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S2808, based on the result of processing in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo-prediction mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2809, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 20, by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In subsequent step S2810, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2809 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. Then, in step S2810, by inputting the number of pseudo portent games to the continuous effect counter, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo portent mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining 4 games), the continuous effect is started. It will happen.

In step S2811, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2812, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S2804 to S2806, or when the negative determination is made in step S2808, the transition triggering role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2209 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S2902, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining 4 games), the continuous effect is started.

In step S2902, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 67(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed without going through the portent mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2902, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2903.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2903 has been executed, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect.

When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2907. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2908 to acquire the effect table for this portent from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2909, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present indication effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2910. In step S2910, a pseudo-predictive effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo omens and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for pseudo omens includes effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue until the next game. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 67(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo omen games in the pseudo omen mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2909 or step S2911, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2912. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2913. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906 or step S2912, or after performing the process of step S2913, this continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing on the side of the main controller 101 is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a game state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to achieve the winning of the order bell, and to acquire a large amount of medals.

As already explained, when the player shifts to, for example, the attack mode as a mode in which a large amount of medals can be obtained, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the game can be played in the attack mode over the initial number of games. If the additional lottery is won in the attack mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the attack mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the attack mode can also be increased.

<Aspect of additional notification>
In this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes are set for addition notification when an increase in the number of continuous games in the attack mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (Also referred to as "post-boarding notification") is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred indicates, for example, a case where the above-mentioned precursor mode occurs or a continuous effect occurs, etc., triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is a series of games that can continue over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the late addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the attack mode. It is different from the series of games in the above-described immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the attack mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

In addition, as an effect mode of the additional notification, as described with reference to FIG. The manner in which the production occurs is also set.

Hereinafter, each aspect of the additional notification will be described including the processing for performing the additional notification.

<Additional notification processing>
The processing for adding notification is performed by the main controller 101 in step S919 of the second special combination processing (FIG. 34), step S1006 of the third special combination processing (FIG. 35), step S1104 of the special zone processing, and the like. The process to be performed. That is, this is a process executed by the main controller 101 after winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode and adding the number of games. In the addition notification processing, settings are made for the game in which the addition notification is to be performed, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

The immediate entry notification is to notify a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG as the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval, and the subsequent notification is the remainder of the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous interval. An effect is performed to notify the number of games of . Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a post-addition counter BG, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG is post-addition to the display remaining number counter HG. equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is set to a predetermined number (this modified In the example, when 1) is reached, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main controller 101 reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the add-on notification, for example, similarly to the case of the add-on notification effect, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the add-on counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the post-loading counter BG managed by the main control unit 101 is subtracted by the notification amount (0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control unit 101 is notified by the post-loading notification. The remaining game number display ZGP on the auxiliary display section 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the additional winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. In this embodiment, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is won, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

That is, in the add-on notification process, as shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S3001, the process of grasping the add-on counter BG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S3002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-boarding lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether post-boarding notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-boarding counter BG grasped in step S3001.

As shown in FIG. 71, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification is different depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types rather than so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the game in the advantageous interval, that is, the game in the attack mode, progresses, the value of the trailing counter BG often increases. At the beginning of , the value of the trailing counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

That is, when an additional winning is made at the beginning of the game in the attack mode, there is a high probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected. is always selected in the beginning of the attack mode. As a result, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early after the attack mode starts.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the player wins the additional prize. If the additional winning game is not selected and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S3004, processing is performed to add the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S3005, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

The addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 72, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the time of the stop operation of the first reel, the time of the stop operation of the second reel, and the time of the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. Switch to HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table of the addition notification, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when the first to third reels are compared, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S3005, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the additional notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. In addition command setting processing (step S920, step S1007, step S1105, etc.), the addition command is set. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information (FIG. 55).

If it is determined in step S3003 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S3007, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, this add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-loading flag indicates that the post-loading notification should be performed when the value of the post-loading counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting process executed subsequent to the addition notification process, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game ( FIG. 55 , step S2403: NO).

<Post-loading notification processing>
Next, the post-loading notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The post-addition notification process is a process executed in step S1402 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 45) in main controller 101. FIG.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current display mode is one of attack mode, VB mode, and special zone. As already explained, it is possible to determine which display mode is by grasping the corresponding flag. If it is not in these modes, that is, if it is in the normal mode or the challenge mode, the post-boarding notification process is terminated. If the mode is any one of the attack mode, VB mode, and special zone, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. In the case of either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification processing is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103 to perform subtraction processing of the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S3103, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display section 65 so as to update the display of the number of remaining games ZGP. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

In step S3104, as a result of processing in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers a post-addition notification. If it does not reach the predetermined value, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it reaches the predetermined value, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-boarding flag is not set, the post-boarding notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the post-loading flag is set, the process advances to step S3106. In step S3106, the value of the trailing counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S3107, a process of setting an add-on command is performed so that an add-on notification corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. The add-on command in this case includes information that an add-on notification is performed in the game and information that an add-on of the number of games corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. It should be noted that it is also possible to add a part of the post-loading counter BG. It is preferable to set the information that is performed in the superposition command.

In the following step S3108, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in step S3107 from the additional counter BG is performed. Then, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0 as a result of the processing in step S3108. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the process for clearing the post-loading flag is performed in step S3110, and then the post-loading notification process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the add-on command to the display control device 81 in the add-on notification processing in the winning result handling processing, the display control device 81 performs the step In S2609 or step S2619, a process for performing an additional notification effect is executed in the process for an additional notification at the time of full stop. As a result, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches the predetermined value, the additional information is executed as the additional information after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, while expecting that an additional notification (post-addition notification) will be performed, A stop OFF operation is performed.

Incidentally, the third reel stop OFF operation in the timing of the additional information selected in the case of performing the immediate information can be different timing from the time of full stop in the case of performing the subsequent information. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and if the corresponding reel may stop at that timing, the timing is slightly delayed due to the slip control. In some cases, the corresponding reel stops. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation can be slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification processing in the winning result handling processing is the timing after the winning result handling processing is executed, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are complete. It is the timing after the medal is paid out (after the payout determination process of step S413 is executed) if a minor win has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-boarding notification is executed can be a timing later than the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate boarding notification.

Here, in this embodiment, when winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the normal game state or the 1st RT state, or when winning the VB mode in the 2nd RT state, the freeze effect is executed. . The freeze effect in this case is not executed in the winning game for the first BB or the like, but is executed in a specific game after a predetermined game from the winning game. That is, in the game before the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is preset. Various types of processing relating to the freeze effect will be described below.

<BB Winning Process>
The BB winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S814 of the first special combination process (FIG. 33) in the main controller 101, and freezes when the BB is won in the state where the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. It is for setting the execution of the production.

In the BB winning process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag (bonus winning flag) is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. If the bonus winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the set bonus winning flag is the CB winning flag, that is, whether or not the winning bonus is CB. do.

If the negative determination is made in step S3201 (if the bonus winning flag is not set) or if the affirmative determination is made in step S3202 (if the set bonus winning flag is the CB winning flag), this BB winning as it is end the processing. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if the set bonus winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, and the first BB or the second BB is won, steps S3203 to step Proceeding to S3205, processing for setting the portent mode is performed. That is, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the game is shifted to the omen mode, and after each game in the omen mode, the bonus winning notification is made.

The processing of steps S3203 to S3205 is similar to that of steps S810 to S812 described above. That is, in step S3203, the predictive game number table is acquired from the ROM 105, and in step S3204, based on the predictive game number table acquired in step S3203 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, Lottery processing for determining the number of precursor games is performed. Thereafter, in step S3205, the number of precursor games obtained by lottery is input to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the number of precursor games is set. The portent counter is decremented by 1 in step S1506 of the number-of-games management process (FIG. 46) described above, that is, when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the predictive game number table obtained in step S3203, when the BB win is made in the situation where the display mode is the normal mode, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 80%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected. Games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, when the BB is won during the challenge mode, the number of precursor games is set to always be 0 games.

After execution of step S3205, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games set in step S3205 is greater than 0 in step S3206. When the number of precursor games is greater than 0, that is, when one or more precursor games are set, the flow advances to step S3207 to execute a freeze lottery process for randomly determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect. In step S3207, a freeze lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and based on the lottery table and lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106, whether or not to execute a freeze effect. lottery. The winning probability of the freeze effect is arbitrary, and is set to 70%, for example. The freeze lottery process may be omitted, or the winning probability for the freeze effect may be set to 100%, so that the freeze effect is always executed.

In subsequent step S3208, it is determined whether or not execution of the freeze effect has been won as a result of the freeze lottery. When the execution of the freeze effect is won, the processes of steps S3209 to S3212 are executed, and the process for presetting the execution of the freeze effect is performed. In the setting process, first, in step S3209, a process of allocating the type of freeze effect to be executed is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of freeze effects with different execution modes are set as freeze effects. Specifically, three types of freeze effects including a first freeze effect, a second freeze effect and a third freeze effect are set.

Here, an outline of each freeze effect will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). The freeze effect is to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (revolving body) based on the operation of the start lever 41, and to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42-44. When the normal game motion to be stopped is the normal game motion, the effect is to restrict at least one of the start and progress of the normal game motion. More specifically, even if the player operates the start lever 41 or the stop switches 42 to 44, the rotation start control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 are controlled. This is an effect in which at least one of the rotation stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not executed (limited).

The first freeze effect to the third freeze effect are set as rotation effects performed when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. When each freeze effect is executed, when the starting operation of the start lever 41 is performed in a situation where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the normal rotation direction (positive direction, downward direction, revolving direction) and , the reels 32L, 32M and 32R rotate in opposite directions. While the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating in the reverse direction, even if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not controlled to stop. 32R continues reverse rotation as it is. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R cannot be stopped at will by the player. Further, the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at this time is slower than the normal rotation speed, and the player can easily grasp that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating in the reverse direction, and The speed is such that the player can easily identify each symbol seen from each display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the reverse rotation (rotation by a predetermined amount), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R temporarily stop with the "red 7" symbols lined up on a predetermined line. At this time, if the freeze effect to be executed is assigned to the first freeze effect, the red 7 matching freeze effect in the middle row where the "red 7" pattern is aligned on the middle line L2 and temporarily stopped is assigned to the second freeze effect. If the "red 7" pattern is aligned with the right rising line L5 and temporarily stops, it will be a right rising red 7 aligned freeze effect, and if it is distributed to the third freeze effect, the "red 7" pattern will be on the top. A freeze effect is produced in which the upper row red 7 is aligned and temporarily stopped in line L1. After the combination of the "red 7" symbols is temporarily stopped in this way, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward to shift to normal rotation control, and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. As a result, the symbol corresponding to the game result of the current game stops on the active line.

Returning to the description of the BB winning process (FIG. 74), in step S3209, the freeze type distribution table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and based on the distribution table and the lottery counter value, Freeze type distribution processing is performed. In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 75(a), when there is no overlapping winning with the attack mode, the first freeze effect is selected at 60%, the second freeze effect is selected at 30%, and the second freeze effect is selected at 30%. 3 Freeze effect is set to be selected at 10%. That is, when only BB is won, the first freeze effect is most likely to be selected, and the third freeze effect is least likely to be selected. On the other hand, if there is a duplicate winning with the attack mode, the first freeze effect is selected at 10%, the second freeze effect is selected at 30%, and the third freeze effect is selected at 60%. ing. That is, when winning not only the BB but also the attack mode, the third freeze effect is most likely to be selected, and the first freeze effect is least likely to be selected. Therefore, the player has the highest expectation of double winning of the BB and the attack mode when the third freeze effect is executed.

Incidentally, the first freeze effect, the second freeze effect and the third freeze effect do not occur except when the BB is won when the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the BB win is confirmed by the occurrence of each freeze effect. In this sense, the freeze effects can be said to be fixed effects of the first BB and the second BB.

After step S3209 is executed, a freeze flag corresponding to the freeze type sorting result is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S3210. That is, when the first freeze effect is selected, the first freeze flag is set, when the second freeze effect is selected, the second freeze flag is set, and when the third freeze effect is selected, the third freeze flag is set. set. These flags are for the main controller 101 to grasp which freeze effect is set to be executed.

In the subsequent step S3211, a freeze counter FC is set in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. The freeze counter FC determines the number of games to be played from the BB win to the execution of the freeze performance, in other words, the number of games after the BB win to execute the freeze performance. In this embodiment, the value of the freeze counter FC is set to the same value as the precursor counter set in step S3205. This freeze counter FC is decremented by one at the start of each game.

Thereafter, in step S3212, a process of setting the freeze stock command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The freeze stock command includes information indicating that the execution of the freeze effect has been set in advance, the type of freeze effect to be executed, and the number of games after which the freeze effect will be executed.

After execution of step S3212, if a negative determination is made in step S3206 (if the number of precursor games is 0) or if a negative determination is made in step S3208 (if the freeze effect execution lottery is not won), the process proceeds to step S3213. Then, the BB winning process is terminated.

<VB mode winning process>
Next, the VB mode winning process will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. This process is executed in step S909 of the second special combination process (FIG. 34) in the main controller 101, and when the VB mode is won in the state where the game state is the second RT state, the freeze effect is executed. is for setting

In the VB mode winning process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is greater than zero. In this case, the number of precursory games to be determined is the number of precursory games set in step S908 of the second special combination processing. If the number of precursor games is greater than 0, then in step S3202 a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect. In the subsequent step S3203, it is determined whether or not the execution of the freeze effect has been won, and if the execution of the freeze effect has been won, the fourth freeze flag is set in the step S3304. The fourth freeze flag is a flag corresponding to executing the first freeze effect in the second RT state.

After executing step S3304, a freeze counter FC is set in step S3305, and then a freeze stock command is set in step S3306. In step S3305, as in step S3211 of the BB winning process (FIG. 74), the freeze counter FC is set to the same value as the precursor counter. After step S3306 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3303, a precursor command is set in step S3307, and then this VB mode winning process is terminated.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, rotation effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S401 of the reel control process (FIG. 19) in the main controller 101, and is for executing the freeze effect set in the BB winning process or the VB mode winning process. is.

In the rotation effect processing, first, at step S3401, it is determined whether or not the execution of the freeze effect is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first freeze flag, second freeze flag, third freeze flag, and fourth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. If any freeze flag is set, in step S3402, the value of the freeze counter FC set in the counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is decremented by 1 to update the freeze counter FC. Note that the rotation effect process is a process executed at the start of the game (when the start lever 41 is operated), so the freeze counter FC is updated at the start of each game.

In the subsequent step S3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter FC is zero. If the value of the freeze counter FC is 0, the process advances to step S3404 to determine whether the freeze flag set in the RAM 106 is the first freeze flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, the set first freeze flag is cleared in step S3405, and in subsequent step S3406, the first freeze effect in the game (middle red 7 matching freeze effect, FIG. 75 (b)) is set to be executed.

Here, the relationship between the freeze effect and the display effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. As already explained, in the BB winning game or the VB mode winning game, a lottery for transition to the portent mode is performed, and the mode is shifted to the portent mode with a predetermined probability. Then, when the mode is shifted to the portent mode, the number of remaining games in the portent mode and the number of games in which the continuous effect is executed are referred to, and the result display of the continuous effect (FIG. 68) is displayed in the final game of the portent mode. Thus, the execution start timing of continuous production is controlled. For example, in the BB winning game, if the number of omen mode games is set to 5 games (omen counter = 4) and a continuous effect is set to be executed over 4 games, the remaining number of omen mode games is 4 games ( A continuous effect is started in a game with an omen counter=3).

Then, when the freeze effect is executed, the value of the freeze counter FC set in the BB winning game (the number of games from the BB winning game to the execution of the freeze effect) is referred to, and the execution timing of the freeze effect is controlled. be done. As described above, the freeze counter FC is set to the same value as the omen counter, and when the value of the freeze counter FC becomes 0, the freeze effect is executed. freeze effect is executed. Here, since the final game of the sign mode is the final game of the continuous effect, when the player operates the start lever 41 to start the final game of the continuous effect, the freeze effect is executed accordingly.

When executing the freeze effect, as shown in FIG. 68(a1), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a specific image for the freeze effect (for example, an image in which flames are displayed behind the main character). At this time, the speaker 64 outputs a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice, "Whoa!") in accordance with the display of the image. The special behavior of the reels 32L, 32R, 32R and the above-mentioned image, etc., by the freeze effect make the final game of the continuous effect lively, increase the impact and increase the sense of worth seeing, and also give the player a sense of exhilaration and superiority. A performance effect such as being enhanced can be obtained.

Returning to the description of the rotation effect processing (FIG. 77), if a negative determination is made in step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3407 to determine whether or not the set freeze flag is the fourth freeze flag. When it is the 4th freeze flag, at step S3408, the set 4th freeze flag is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S3406 to set the first freeze effect to be executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3407, it is determined in step S3409 whether or not the set freeze flag is the second freeze flag. In the case of the second freeze flag, at step S3410, the set second freeze flag is cleared, and at subsequent step S3411, the second freeze effect (FIG. 75(b)) is executed in the game. is set to

A negative determination in step S3409 means that the set freeze flag is the third freeze flag. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3412 to clear the set third freeze flag, and then in step S3413, the third freeze effect (FIG. 75(b)) is set to be executed in the game. .

After execution of step S3406, step S3411 or step S3413, or when a negative determination is made in step S3401 or step S3403, the process proceeds to step S3414 to execute other rotation effect setting processing. In other rotation effect setting processing, various rotation effects provided in addition to the above-mentioned freeze effects (for example, effects that change the rotation start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R Freeze effect etc.) to be performed without starting. After executing the process of step S3403, this rotation effect|presentation process is complete|finished.

By the way, although the freeze effect is expected to have the above-described effect, it also has the side effect of causing a decrease in the time efficiency in the game because the effect cannot be ended according to the player's intention. For this reason, a player who wants to play as many games as possible may want to give priority to game digestion efficiency over freeze effects. In addition, even when there is little time to play the game, such as when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, there may be a desire to quickly complete the game by omitting the freeze effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that, when the execution of the freeze effect is set in advance, the execution can be canceled before the effect is executed. A configuration for that purpose will be described below.

<Processing for unfreezing>
The freeze release processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. This process is executed in step S414 of the reel control process (FIG. 19), and is for canceling the execution of the freeze effect after the execution of the freeze effect is set.

In the freeze releasing process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the execution of the freeze effect is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any freeze flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106 d of the RAM 106 . If one of the freeze flags is stored and execution of the freeze effect is set, the process advances to step S3502 to determine whether the freeze counter FC is greater than 0 or not. That is, in this step, it is determined whether or not the game is before the game in which the freeze effect is executed.

If the freeze counter FC is greater than 0 and the game is before the freeze effect execution game, in step S3503 it is determined whether or not the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the reach-eye stop mode. determine whether More specifically, it is determined whether or not a specific reach number (either reach number A or reach number B in FIG. 18) among the reach numbers set in the slot machine 10 is stopped. In step S3503, the symbol number stopped at the base position on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the symbol number corresponds to the reach eye A or the reach eye B. , to determine whether or not a specific reach eye is stopped.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the process advances to step S3504 to determine whether the set freeze flag is either the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect scheduled to be executed is a freeze effect other than the third freeze effect.

If the set freeze flag is either the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag, in step S3505, the set freeze flag and the freeze set in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 Clear the counter FC. This cancels (invalidates) the execution of the freeze effect. In the following step S3506, a freeze release command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The freeze release command indicates that the execution of the freeze effect has been released, and the display control device 81 can recognize that the freeze effect has been released by receiving the freeze release command. . When the display control device 81 receives the freeze release command, the display control device 81 controls so that the specific image of the freeze effect (FIG. 68(a)) is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the final game of the continuous effect, or effects corresponding thereto. Control so that no sound is output.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3503 (if it is determined that the reach number has not stopped), it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the 11th regame winning has been established. As already explained, this 11th replay win is a replay combination that can be won only in the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 25, etc.), and serves as a reach number when the VB mode is won. It fulfills. The eleventh replay combination is designed to be won together with the first replay combination (see IV=56 in FIG. 25). Then, when the eleventh replay combination is won, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (left→middle→right or left→right→middle). When operated, the winning of the 11th replay combination is established, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the above operation order, the winning of the first replay combination is established. Incidentally, both the 11th replay combination and the first replay combination are non-transition rolls that do not involve the transition of the game state.

Here, the pressing order notification process (pressing order notification process for reach number) for functioning the 11th replay combination as the winning number when the VB mode is won will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79 . This process is executed in step S1323 of the pushing process (FIG. 44) in the main controller 101. More specifically, if the current lottery result is not a bell win in step S1319 of the pushing process. It is executed when it is determined.

In the reach eye pressing order notification process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the VB mode is won. If the VB mode win flag is not set (if the VB mode is not won), it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the result of this lottery is a reach-th replay (11th replay combination) win. do.

In the case of the reach-eye replay winning, the process advances to step S3603 to execute first replay pressing order notification processing. Specifically, of the eleventh replay and the first replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 24(b)). In the subsequent step S3604, the pressing order notification command is set as an output command to the display control device 81. FIG. The pressing order notification command includes information indicating that the pressing order is to be notified by the instruction monitor 68 as well as information indicating the pressing order notified in step S3603. The display control device 81 receives the command. By doing so, the pressing order notified by the instruction monitor 68 can be comprehended. Information indicating that the 11th replay role has been won and information indicating that the VB mode has been won are included in the lottery result command set in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 16). there is

In the display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command and the lottery result command, in accordance with the pressing order notification of the first replaying role on the instruction monitor 68, the pressing order of the first replaying role is also reported on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. control so that The control processing is performed in steps S2314 to S2316 of the pressing order notification processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined at step S2314 whether or not the VB mode has been won. determine whether or not In the case of the reach-eye replay winning, the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning is notified in step S2316. Specifically, referring to the pressing order notification command output from the main controller 101, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification that the winning of the first replay combination is established. After execution of step S2316, if the determination in step S2314 is affirmative (if the VB mode is won) or if the determination is negative in step S2315 (if the lottery result this time is not winning the reach replay), the push order End the notification process.

Returning to the description of the reach eye pressing order notification process (FIG. 79), after execution of step S3604, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 (if the VB mode winning flag is set) or if a negative determination is made in step S3602 ( If the result of the lottery this time is not winning the replay of the reach number, the push order notification process for the reach number is terminated.

By the above-described processing, when the winning replay combination is won in a situation where the VB mode is not won, the instruction monitor 68, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like notify the pushing order of the first replay combination. When the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 according to the notification, the symbol combination corresponding to the first replay combination is stopped on the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Therefore, when the VB mode is not won, the winning of the first replay combination becomes easier.

On the other hand, if the winning replay combination is won while the VB mode is won, the instruction monitor 68 and the auxiliary display section 65 do not notify the player of the pressing order. In this case, the player is expected to operate the stop switches 42-44 in the usual order of operation. Generally, it is assumed that many players stop the left reel 32L first, but in this embodiment, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated first, the 11th replay combination is won. is configured as Therefore, in a situation where the pressing order information is not performed, the 11th replay combination is more likely to win.

In this way, when the winning replay combination is won in a situation where the VB mode has not been won, the pushing order of the normal replay combination different from the corresponding reaching replay combination is announced, while the VB mode has been won. When winning the reach replay combination in a situation where the winning combination is in the VB mode, the 11th replay combination functions as the reach combination when the VB mode is won by not executing the notification of the pressing order.

Incidentally, the main display mode in the second RT state is the attack mode, and in this mode, notification of the pressing order of the replay combination and the bell combination is performed more frequently than in the normal mode. Under such circumstances, for example, in the case of winning a reach-eye replay combination (11th replay combination), if the configuration is such that the push order notification for winning the combination is executed, the player follows the push order notification. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are indifferently operated, the reach replay combination will be awarded. In this regard, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is not executed when the reach replay combination (the eleventh replay combination) is won, the player can have a sense of anticipation in a game in which the pressing order notification is not executed. 42 to 44 will be operated, and moreover interest in the stop roll in the game will increase. Therefore, it is possible to favorably enhance interest and to make it easier for the player to notice the winning of the reach-eye replay combination.

Returning to the description of the freeze release process (FIG. 78), if the affirmative determination is made in step S3507 (if the 11th replay role winning), the process proceeds to step S3505 to clear the freeze flag and freeze counter FC, freeze Cancel the execution of the production. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3507, the freeze releasing process is terminated.

<Game Flow Regarding Freeze Effects>
Next, referring to FIG. 80, the flow of the game relating to the freeze effect will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the execution of the freeze effect is set in association with the winning of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when a BB win is made in a certain game, execution of a freeze effect is set with a predetermined probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game after a predetermined number of games from the game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80(b), when the player does not stop the specific reach roll (read roll A or reach roll B) until the game immediately before the specific game is finished, A freeze effect is executed based on the above settings in the specific game. Since the final game of the continuous effect is performed in the specific game, after the freeze effect is executed, the winning result in the continuous effect is reported (Fig. 68 (a) → Fig. 68 (b1) → Fig. 68 (b2) flow ).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(c), when the player stops the specific reach number until the game immediately before the specific game ends, the execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is canceled. be done. That is, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for stopping the specific reach eye is an operation for canceling the execution of the freeze effect. Therefore, the player can grasp the BB winning and cancel the execution of the freeze performance, and can complete both the grasp of the BB winning and the cancellation of the freeze performance by one operation. When the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, the freeze effect is not executed in the specific game, and in the final game of the continuous effect, the victory result is notified with the freeze effect omitted (Fig. 68 (b1) -> Fig. 68(b2) flow). In addition, when the execution of the freeze effect is set and when the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, respectively, the notification corresponding to the above setting (for example, the notification indicating that the setting has been made) and the notification corresponding to the cancellation (For example, notification to teach that it has been canceled) is not performed.

Incidentally, when the freeze effect set in the BB winning game is the third freeze effect, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled even if the ready-to-win game is stopped (release operation). That is, the probability of occurrence of the third freeze effect is lower than that of other freeze effects, and the expectation of double winning with the attack mode is also high. The freeze effect, which is assumed to be rare and of high interest to the player, is configured such that the effect execution cannot be canceled.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

After the execution of the freeze performance is set, and before the freeze performance is executed, when a specific reach number is stopped, the set execution of the freeze performance is canceled.

In this embodiment, when the BB or VB mode is internally won, the freeze effect is executed when the result (winning effect) in the final game of the continuous effect is notified, and the game is improved compared to the case of simply notifying the result. be excited. However, if the player is aware of the result (BB winning, etc.) before the result notification and has lost interest in the effect, if the freeze effect is executed again in such a situation, the player may feel annoyed. There is In particular, the freeze effect has the characteristic that the player cannot proceed with the game for a certain period of time because it restricts the start or progress of the normal game action, and the player's interest is increased by detecting a BB win or the like. It is assumed that if the freeze effect is executed while the game is in progress, the player is likely to feel annoyed. In other words, there is a concern that the function of the freeze effect installed to enhance the effect of the effect may actually have the opposite effect depending on the situation when the effect is executed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, first, when a BB or the like is won, by setting so that the freeze effect is performed in a specific game after the winning game, the freeze effect is actually executed after the trigger occurs. Ensure time grace before execution. Utilizing this period, the game machine side judges whether or not the player is likely to recognize BB winning or the like, based on whether or not the reach number is stopped. Then, when it is determined that the player recognizes the player, automatic control is performed so as to cancel the execution of the planned freeze effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress execution of the freeze effect in a situation where the player is aware of the BB winning or the like. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach number does not stop and the player does not recognize the BB winning or the like, the freeze effect is executed as initially planned, thereby suitably enhancing the game. can. In other words, while securing the excitement effect of the game by the freeze effect, it is possible to appropriately suppress the effect from becoming annoying by restricting the execution under a situation where the player is likely to find the effect annoying.

In addition, since the operation of stopping the reach eye can also be seen as an operation for canceling the freeze effect, the following effects can be expected. The freeze effect can increase the effect of the game effect by enlivening the game effect, but as described above, it also has the characteristic of forcing the player to be restricted from proceeding with the game for a certain period of time. Therefore, some players may not want to execute the freeze effect. In this respect, according to this configuration, a player who does not want to execute the freeze effect can perform a cancellation operation (an operation to stop a specific reach eye) even if the condition for executing the freeze effect is satisfied. , its execution can be avoided. That is, it becomes possible for the player to voluntarily avoid the execution of the freeze effect. On the other hand, if the ready-to-win number is not stopped, the freeze effect is executed as originally set, which is convenient for the player who desires the execution of the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to change whether or not to execute the freeze effect according to the taste and state of mind of each player, and it is possible to realize a gaming machine that is easy for any player to play.

Moreover, the following effect can also be produced by the structure in which the freeze effect is canceled when the ready-to-win game is stopped. From the viewpoint of the player, the reach eye functions as one of the effects that enable the player to grasp the winning of the BB or VB mode. It will be fulfilled. For this reason, for a player who has lost interest in the freeze effect and no longer desires the execution of the freeze effect due to sensing the BB winning, for example, there is no need to perform a dedicated operation for canceling the freeze effect again. In other words, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of releasing, and to suppress the annoyance associated with the releasing operation.

Moreover, in this configuration, the reach number that triggers the establishment of the cancellation condition is limited to a part of the reach number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally canceling the execution of the freeze performance by stopping the ready-to-win game for the purpose of recognizing BB winning or the like. There is a gaming machine in which the symbol combination corresponding to the reach number is relatively easily stopped without the player being particularly aware of it when the bonus is won or the bonus is carried over. In the game machine, it is possible to suppress the execution of the freeze effect from being excessively restricted. In other words, it is possible to have an advantageous configuration in favorably ensuring the execution opportunity of the freeze effect.

Some freeze effects (freeze effects with low occurrence probability) are excluded from cancellation. As a result, even if the player erroneously establishes the release condition for the freeze effect, which is assumed to be of high interest to the player, the execution can be guaranteed, and the player will not be greatly disappointed. Avoidable.

<Modification 1>
This modified example differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a predetermined notification is made when an operation to cancel the freeze effect is performed.

When the player performs a release operation of the freeze performance (stop of the specific reach eye), if some kind of notification is made in the slot machine 10, the player can grasp that the release operation has been accepted, which is convenient. . However, on the other hand, such notification is a notification that the player who accidentally performed the cancellation operation without intention to cancel can not see the freeze effect that should have been able to be seen. This may lead to disappointment of the player. Therefore, in this modified example, the configuration is devised so that the player who intentionally performed the release operation and the player who did not are notified separately. The configuration of this modification will be described in detail below.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing a freeze release process according to this modification. This process is executed in place of the freeze release process of FIG. It should be noted that in this process, the description of the same process as the freeze release process in FIG. 78 will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

In the freeze release processing of this modified example, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not any freeze flag is set. If any freeze flag is set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the number-of-games counting flag is set. If the number-of-games counting flag is not set, the process advances to step S3803 to determine whether or not the current game is a BB winning game.

If it is a BB winning game, in step S3804, the number of games counting flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and in the following step S3805, counting of the number of games FG is started. The number-of-games measurement flag is a flag indicating that the number of games FG is being measured. The number of games FG is counted using various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and indicates the number of games completed from the BB winning game. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, the process advances to step S3806 to add 1 to the number of games FG and update the number of games FG.

After execution of steps S3805 and S3806, or when a negative determination is made in step S3803, the processing of steps S3807 to S3811 is executed. These processes are similar to steps S3502 to S3506 in FIG. After setting the freeze release command in step S3811, it is determined in step S3812 whether or not the number of games FG is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 2).

If the number of games FG is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the process advances to step S3813 to set a release notification command as an output command to the display control device 81. FIG. On the other hand, if the number of games FG is not equal to or less than the predetermined value, the process advances to step S3814 to set a ready-to-win stop notification command as an output command to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the release notification command or the reach stop notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the notification corresponding to each command is performed. A specific example of the notification mode will be described later.

After execution of step S3813 or step S3814, the game number counting flag and the game number FG are cleared in step S3815. After execution of step S3815, or when a negative determination is made in step S3801, step S3807, or step S3809, this freeze release processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the processing of steps S3816 to S3818 is executed, and then this freeze release processing is terminated. The processing of steps S3816 to S3818 is the same as steps S3507, S3505 and S3506 in FIG.

<Regarding the flow of the game related to notification>
After the end of the bonus winning game, if the operation to cancel the freeze effect is performed within a predetermined number of games (for example, two games), some kind of opportunity (for example, stop reach eyes other than specific reach eyes, strong cherry role, etc. It is presumed that the player intentionally performed the cancellation operation after sensing or predicting the execution of the freeze effect due to winning of a double role with a bonus such as a strong watermelon role. That is, if the release operation is performed quickly after winning the bonus and the period until the release operation is performed is short, it is determined that the release operation is intentional. In this case, the main control unit 101 outputs a release notification command to the display control unit 81, and as shown in FIG. It controls to be performed in the unit 65 . As a result, it is notified that the execution of the freeze effect has been canceled, and the player can clearly know that the cancellation has been performed.

On the other hand, if the release operation is performed after a predetermined number of games (for example, two games) have been completed after the bonus winning game is over, it is assumed that the player has unintentionally performed the release operation. In this case, the main controller 101 outputs a command for notifying the stop of the reach eye to the display control device 81, and as shown in FIG. It is controlled so that it is performed on the display unit 65 . As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the release of the freeze effect from the notification, and the disappointment of the player who wants to see the freeze effect can be avoided.

In addition, the notification when the release operation is performed after the predetermined number of games is exceeded does not necessarily have to be a notification that the reach eye has stopped, and the player cannot or cannot recognize the cancellation of the freeze effect. Any notification will do. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which notification is not performed when a release operation is performed after a predetermined number of games has been played.

Also, in this modified example, it is not notified that the execution of the freeze effect has been set. By performing the notification, the player can be notified of the timing at which the release operation should be performed, but it also serves as an advance notice of the execution of the freeze effect, which impairs the charm of the freeze effect that invites surprise to the player. This is because

In the above configuration, the number of games is counted, but the release notification is executed according to the time (period) from when the execution of the freeze effect is set (after the BB is won) until the specific reach eye stops. It is good also as a structure which switches whether it carries out. In this case, when the measured time is less than the predetermined time, the cancellation notification is executed, and when the measured time exceeds the predetermined time, the cancellation notification is not executed.

<Modification 2>
This modified example is intended to deal with the case where a plurality of freeze effects are set in duplicate. For example, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the second RT state, the VB mode is won and the freeze effect A is set to be executed, and then the BB win is added during the stay in the sign mode corresponding to the above winning. Execution of freeze effect B may be set in .

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 83(b), both execution of the freeze effect A triggered by winning the VB mode and execution of the freeze effect B triggered by the winning of the BB mode can be performed by one cancellation operation. It is configured to be released collectively. In this case, since it is not necessary to release each freeze effect one by one, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the release operation. The canceling operation in this case may be an operation for canceling the freeze effect triggered by winning the VB mode (winning the 11th replay role), or canceling the freeze effect triggered by winning the BB mode. It may be a time operation (stop of a specific reach).

Also, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the execution of the freeze effect A triggered by the VB mode winning and the execution of the freeze effect B triggered by the BB win are canceled one by one by separate release operations. It is good also as a structure which carries out. At this time, the cancellation operation A for canceling the execution of the freeze effect A and the cancellation operation B for canceling the execution of the freeze effect B may be the same operation. In this case, both freeze effects can be released by a simple operation of repeating the same operation, which simplifies the release operation.

Also, the release operation A for the freeze effect A and the release operation B for the freeze effect B may be different operations. With such a configuration, the player can select and release the freeze effect that the player wants to release. For example, when the player wants to see the freeze effect A but wants to omit the freeze effect B, only the release operation B for the freeze effect B is performed, and the release operation A for the freeze effect A is not performed. In this configuration, the type of freeze effect is different between when the VB mode win is triggered and when the BB win is triggered, the freeze effect is different, and both freeze effects are of interest to the player. It is considered to be effective for configurations where differences are likely to occur.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the method of canceling the set freeze effect is different from that in the first embodiment. In the above-described first embodiment, when a specific reach number is stopped, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, but in this modified example, the effect of confirming the BB winning or the carrying over state of the BB winning is displayed as an auxiliary display. When executed by the unit 65, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. As such an effect, a BB winning announcement, a premium effect, or the like can be considered.

With such a configuration, for example, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), each time a predetermined opportunity is established after the winning game (for example, each time the game is started by operating the start lever 41). , Perform a lottery for the execution of the above-mentioned fixed effect. The execution lottery is performed, for example, up to the game one game before the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed. Then, when winning in the lottery processing of the finalized performance, execution setting is performed so that the finalized performance is executed at a predetermined timing of the game in which the execution lottery is won.

At that time, if the lottery (FIG. 74) for executing the freeze effect executed in the BB winning game is won and the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled (however, the third (excluding freeze effects). That is, in this modification, even if the execution lottery for the freeze effect is won, if the execution lottery for the fixed effect is won, the set freeze effect is not executed.

After that, a command including information indicating that the fixed effect should be executed and the execution timing thereof is set and transmitted to the display control device 81 . Based on the received command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 so that the confirmation effect is executed.

As described above, in this modification, an effect (announcement) that allows the player to recognize that the BB win or its carry-over state is executed, and the player internally wins the BB by watching the effect. can grasp that. In addition, in this configuration, the execution of such an effect satisfies the cancellation condition, and the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the freeze effect is executed under the condition that the player recognizes that the bonus has been won, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

In the above configuration, the freeze effect is canceled when the winning in the execution lottery of the confirmed effect is executed, but the freeze effect may be canceled by performing the setting process for executing the confirmed effect. It may be configured to release the freeze effect with the execution of. In addition, although the BB win has been taken as an example, the configuration of this example can also be adopted for the win in the VB mode.

Further, in the above configuration, the effect that the BB win or its carry-over state is determined is provided, but the BB win or its carry-over state may be suggested. In other words, when an effect that allows the player to predict the BB winning or its carry-over state is executed, the execution of the freeze effect may be cancelled.

Further, in the above configuration, the confirmation effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, but it may be performed by a sound effect from the speaker 64 or a light emission effect by the lamp 63. Further, the effect may be executed using both the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. As such a configuration, a specific effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like in response to the stop of a predetermined chance number on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is conceivable to notify whether or not the player has won or is in a carryover state.

<Modification 4>
This modification differs from the first embodiment in that the set freeze effect is changed to another effect when the cancellation condition is satisfied.

In this modification, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, when a specific reach eye stops, the set freeze effect is not executed, and the freeze effect is scheduled to be executed in the specific game. Change processing is executed so as to execute a short freeze performance whose performance period (execution period) is shorter than the performance. That is, when the condition for canceling the set freeze effect is established, the period of the freeze effect executed in the specific game is shortened.

For example, with a configuration in which execution of the freeze effect itself is canceled when a specific reach number is stopped, a player who accidentally stops a specific reach number cannot see the freeze effect. In this regard, in this configuration, instead of the initially set freeze effect (first freeze effect or second freeze effect), another freeze effect (short freeze effect) with a shorter effect period is executed. ing. In this case, even for the player who does not want the freeze effect, the time during which the player is restricted is shorter than when the original effect is performed, so that annoyance can be reduced. That is, according to this configuration, while considering the player who does not want the freeze effect, even if the player who does not intend to cancel the freeze effect accidentally stops a specific reach eye, it is possible to see the freeze effect. can be configured.

Instead of the short freeze effect, the effect may be changed to an effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (an image effect in which the player can grasp or predict the BB winning or its carry-over state). Since the effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like can be terminated halfway at the player's will, such as betting medals, the effect period does not necessarily have to be shorter than the initially set freeze effect. do not have. According to this configuration, a player who does not want a freeze effect can avoid execution of a freeze effect as in the first embodiment, and a player who unintentionally stops a specific reach number can , you can't see the freeze effect, but you can see the fixed effect instead.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the method of canceling the set freeze effect is different from that in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, when a specific reach eye stops, the execution of the freeze effect is uniformly canceled, but in this modification, after the execution of the freeze effect is set (BB is elected (from)) The configuration is such that the presence or absence of release is switched according to the number of games until a specific reach number is stopped. Specifically, when the execution of the freeze effect is set in the BB winning process (FIG. 74), in the same manner as in steps S3802 to S3808 of the first modification, the game until a specific reach eye stops count the number.

Then, if the counted number of games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 2 games), some kind of opportunity (for example, stoppage of reach points other than specific reach points, bonuses such as strong cherry roles and strong watermelon roles, etc.) After detecting or predicting the execution of the freeze performance by winning a double role, it is presumed that the player intentionally performed the release operation, and the execution of the freeze performance is released. On the other hand, when the counted number of games is larger than the predetermined number of games, it is assumed that the player has unintentionally stopped the specific reach number, and the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled.

Thus, according to this configuration, the timing of stopping the specific reach eye (timing of establishment of the cancellation condition) is grasped, and based on the result, it is switched whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect. As a result, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned release after determining whether the fulfillment of the release condition is based on the intention of the player, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unwilling release for the player. .

In the above configuration, the number of games is counted, but the freeze effect is performed according to the time (period) from when the execution of the freeze effect is set (after the BB is won) to when a specific reach eye stops. It may be configured to switch whether or not to cancel the execution. In this case, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when the measured time is less than the predetermined time, and the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled when the time exceeds the predetermined time.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the operation for canceling the execution of the freeze effect.

In the first embodiment, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled (invalidated) by stopping the specific reach number. In this case, the execution of the freeze performance can be canceled not only when the ready-to-win numbers are stopped for the purpose of canceling the freeze performance, but also when the ready-to-win numbers are stopped for the purpose of detecting BB winning. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so as to suppress unintended cancellation by the player. The configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

FIG. 84(a) is a flowchart showing reel control processing (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment. It should be noted that the processing of steps S4001 and S4002 of FIG. 84(a) is executed instead of step S414 in the reel control processing of FIG.

After executing the payout determination process in step S413, reach determination process is performed in step S4001. Here, the reach eye determination processing in step S4001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84(b).

In the reach eye determination process, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not any freeze flag is set (whether or not the execution of the freeze effect is set), and if the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S4102 Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0 (whether or not the freeze effect has not yet been executed). If the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0, it is determined in step S4103 whether or not the reach eye has stopped.

In step S4103, unlike step S3503 in FIG. 78 (processing for determining stoppage of reach points), regardless of the type of reach points, it is determined whether or not any reach point is stopped. In this embodiment, it is not always possible to stop the reach stitches regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the reach stitches may not be stopped depending on the operation timing. In other words, although the reach number does not matter, the reach number is stopped only when the operation is performed at the timing when the reach number is stopped.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103 (if the reach eye is stopped), it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag is set. If the ready-to-win number has not stopped, it is checked in step S4105 whether or not the 11th replay (special replay functioning as a ready-to-win number corresponding to winning in the attack mode in the VB mode) has been won. judge. If negative determinations are made in steps S4101, S4102, S4104, and S4105, this reach eye determination process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104 or step S4105, a reach stop flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S4106. The reach eye stop flag is a flag indicating that the reach eye has stopped. In the following step S4107, a reach eye stop command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this reach eye determination processing is terminated. The reach eye stop command is a command for notifying that the reach eye has stopped, and the display control device 81 can grasp that the reach eye has stopped by receiving the reach eye stop command.

Returning to the description of FIG. 84(a), after executing the reach eye determination process in step S4001, the freeze release process is executed in step S4002, and then the winning result corresponding process is executed in step S414 (FIG. 78). do. The freeze release processing will be described later in detail.

Next, timer interrupt processing (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85(a). Note that the process of step S4201 in FIG. 85(a) is executed between the process of step S108 and the process of step S109 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

After step S108 (timer subtraction processing) is executed, in step S4201, settlement switch corresponding processing is executed to determine whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. After executing the process, the process of step S109 (the process of outputting the count result such as the number of bets to the external centralized terminal board 121) is executed.

Here, the settlement switch correspondence processing in step S4201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85(b). In this process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated based on the detection signal of the settlement detection sensor 59a (FIG. 12). If it is determined that the settlement switch 59 has been operated, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the game is being executed. When at least one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotating (during a period after the start operation is performed by the start lever 41 and before the final stop operation is performed), the game is being executed, and in this case, it is determined whether or not the reach stop flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S4303.

The reach stop flag is set when the reach eye stops before the execution of the freeze effect after the execution of the freeze effect is set. This means that the settlement switch 59 has been operated after the eye has stopped. In this case, the flow advances to step S4304 to set the release operation flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. This release operation flag indicates that an operation has been performed to release (invalidate) the execution of the freeze effect. That is, this embodiment has a configuration in which the execution of the freeze effect is canceled (invalidated) by operating the settlement switch 59 after the ready-to-win number has stopped. After execution of step S4304, or when a negative determination is made in steps S4301 and S4303, this settlement switch handling process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4305 (if the game is not being executed), it means that the settlement switch 59 has been operated while the game is not being executed. A medal return flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the processing corresponding to the settlement switch is terminated. The medal return flag indicates that medal return processing should be executed. If the flag is set, it is determined in the sensor monitoring process of step S107 (FIG. 12) that the settlement operation has been performed (the settlement switch 59 has been operated for the purpose of settlement), and the credited virtual Execute medal return processing for paying out the same number of medals. The medal return flag is cleared when the medal return processing is completed.

Note that the medal return process is performed in a state where none of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating (a state in which the game is not started by operating the start lever 41) regardless of whether or not medals have been bet. If the adjustment switch 59 is operated, it will be executed. At that time, when medals are betted, the number of medals corresponding to both the bet amount and the credit amount is paid out. Further, when the replay is established, if the settlement switch 59 is operated before the start of the next game, medal return processing is executed. At that time, the bet amount based on the establishment of the replay is not paid out, and only the number of medals corresponding to the credit amount is paid out.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86, the freeze release processing of step S4002 (FIG. 84(a)) will be described.

In the freeze cancellation process, first, the processes of steps S4401 and S4402 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S4101 and S4102. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, the process advances to step S4403 to determine whether or not the release operation flag is set. When the release operation flag is set, in step S4404, the set reach stop flag and release operation flag are cleared, and then in step S4405, the set freeze flag and freeze counter FC to clear. When the freeze flag is cleared in this manner, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in the rotation effect processing (FIG. 76), so the freeze effect is no longer executed. That is, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled.

In subsequent step S4406, a freeze release command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the notification corresponding to the cancellation of the execution of the freeze effect is not executed. Also, even when the execution of the freeze effect is set, the notification corresponding to the setting is not executed. After execution of step S4406, or when a negative determination is made in steps S4401 and S4403, this freeze releasing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4402 (if the value of the freeze counter FC is 0), that is, if the game is a freeze effect execution game, the flow advances to step S4407 to determine whether or not the ready-to-win stop flag is set. determine whether If the affirmative determination is made in this step, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the reach eye stops before the execution of the freeze effect, and then the value of the freeze counter FC is reached while the adjustment switch 59 is not operated. becomes 0 (a specific game is reached). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4407, the reach stop flag is cleared in step S4408. That is, the freeze flag and freeze counter FC are not cleared, but only the reach stop flag is cleared. After execution of step S4408 or when a negative determination is made in step S4407, this freeze releasing process is terminated.

<Game Flow Regarding Freeze Effects>
Next, referring to FIG. 87, the flow of the game relating to the freeze effect will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the execution of the freeze effect is set in association with the winning of the BB. Note that descriptions of the same parts as those of the first embodiment are appropriately simplified or omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), when a BB win is made in a certain game, execution of a freeze effect is set with a predetermined probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game after a predetermined number of games from the game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(b), the player stops the reach number in the game before the specific game, and then, as shown in FIG. 87(c), the game immediately before the specific game ends. If the settlement switch 59 is operated during this period, the execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is cancelled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87(d), if the settlement switch 59 is not operated until the end of the previous game, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game. be done. The freeze effect in this case is performed in accordance with the final game (FIG. 68) of the continuous effect as described in the first embodiment. Note that if the settlement switch 59 is operated without a prior stop of the ready-to-win game, or even if there is a prior stop of the ready-to-win game, the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period in which the game is not being executed (a period during which payment processing is performed). Also in this case, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

After the execution of the freeze performance is set, when the ready-to-win number is stopped and the settlement switch 59 is operated, the execution of the set freeze performance is canceled. In this case, since the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled only by stopping the ready-to-win game, the inconvenience that the execution of the freeze effect is canceled as a result of the player performing a stop operation for the purpose of detecting the winning of the BB is prevented. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player can select again whether or not to execute the freeze effect after detecting the BB winning by stopping the reach number. For this reason, for example, a player who has lost interest in the freeze effect due to sensing the BB winning and no longer desires to execute the freeze effect can avoid the execution of the freeze effect by pressing the checkout switch 59. can. On the other hand, a player who has a high interest in the freeze effect and wants to see the freeze effect even after detecting the BB winning can execute the freeze effect by not pressing the checkout switch 59. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, stopping the reach number and freezing effect are not alternatives, and both of them can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to respond flexibly to the player's desire to see both.

The execution of the freeze performance is canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 during game execution, and the execution of the freeze performance is not canceled even if the settlement switch 59 is operated during the period when the game is not being executed.

For example, when the adjustment switch 59 is operated for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect during the validity period of medal return, medal return processing is executed. In this case, it becomes impossible to bet medals until the return (payout) of the medals is completed, and the game is uselessly interrupted for the player. At this time, not only is the player offended, but the number of games played per unit time is reduced, which may be disadvantageous. In this regard, according to the present configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. In other words, by limiting the period of the operation to cancel the freeze effect to the period during which the game is being executed (the period during which the medal return process is not performed), it is possible to operate the adjustment switch during game execution to cancel the execution of the freeze effect. It is expected that the recognition of "necessary" will spread among players. As a result, it is expected that the operation of the checkout switch 59 for the purpose of canceling the freeze during the effective period of token return will be reduced, and the occurrence of unintended token return processing for the player can be suppressed. Become.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, since the period of the operation for canceling the freeze effect and the effective period of the return of the medals are separated, it is possible to avoid the duplicate execution of the process of canceling the freeze effect and the process of returning the medals. As a result, an increase in the processing load on main controller 101 can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
This modification differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the method for canceling the freeze effect is notified.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing (processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81) according to this embodiment. Note that the processing of steps S4601 to S4607 of FIG. 88 is performed when a negative determination is made in step S2009 in the effect setting processing of FIG. 51 or after execution of step S2010.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009 (if the command received from the main control unit 101 does not include a full stop command) or after executing the processing of step S2010 (all stop effect setting processing), the process proceeds to step S4601. Then, it is determined whether or not the command received from the main controller 101 includes the reach eye stop command (step S4107 in FIG. 84). If the reach eye stop command is included, it means that the reach eye has stopped before the execution of the freeze effect after the execution of the freeze effect is set. It is determined whether or not the game is a specific game scheduled to execute a freeze effect, in other words, whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the specific game. This determination is made by, for example, counting the number of games remaining until a specific game ascertained based on the precursor command or the freeze stock command transmitted from the main control device 101 each time the game is executed by the display control device 81. This is done by referring to the count result, for example.

If the current game is not the game immediately before the specific game, the process advances to step S4603 to set the first notification to be executed in the next game. The first notification is a cancellation operation notification for teaching that the execution of the freeze effect can be canceled and how to cancel it. For example, as shown in FIG. You can release the freeze stock by pressing it." is displayed. As a result, even if the player does not know that the freeze effect can be released and how to release it, the freeze effect can be easily released. In step S4603, the first notification is set to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, one game) from the next game.

After execution of step S4603, if a negative determination is made in step S4601 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4604. The reason why the first notification is not executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S4602 (when the next game is a specific game) is because the operation of the settlement switch 59 when the game is not being executed is not treated as a cancellation operation. (See steps S4302 and S4305 in FIG. 85(b)). That is, the ready-to-win stop command is a command that is transmitted at the end of the game in which the ready-to-win numbers are stopped. Therefore, if the determination in step S4602 is affirmative, the ready-to-win numbers are stopped in the immediately preceding game, and the ready-to-win numbers are stopped by the ready-to-win stop command. This is the case when it is notified at the end (after the end) of the immediately preceding game. In this case, the player can perform the release operation during the game pause period until the specific game is started. Even if the notification is given and the operation of the settlement switch 59 is urged, the inconvenience is caused that the freezing effect is not canceled even though the cancellation operation is performed in accordance with the notification. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the first notification is not executed when the ready-to-win numbers have stopped in the immediately preceding game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

In step S4604, it is determined whether or not the command received from main controller 101 includes a freeze release command (step S4406 in FIG. 86). If the freeze release command is included, it means that the freeze effect release operation has been performed. In this case, it is determined in step S4605 whether or not the first notification is being executed. If the first notification is being executed, end setting is made in step S4606 to end the execution of the first notification.

After execution of step S4606 or when a negative determination is made in step S4605 (when canceling operation is performed after the end of the execution period of the first notification), the second notification is set to be executed in step S4607. The second notification is notification that the freeze effect has been canceled (that the cancellation operation has been accepted), and when execution of the notification is set, for example, as shown in FIG. In the portion 65 or the like, characters such as "The freeze stock has been released" are displayed. As a result, the player can clearly know that the execution of the freeze effect has been cancelled. Note that, unlike the first notification, the second notification is set so as to be executed in the game in which the release operation has been performed, more specifically, to be executed immediately after the release operation has been performed.

After executing step S4607, the process advances to step S2011 to execute other processing. In step S2011, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

In this way, in this modification, since it is configured to teach the player how to cancel the freeze effect, the player cannot cancel the freeze effect without knowing the operation method, or accidentally performs another operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a relaxing inconvenience. Further, by performing the above teaching when the reach number is stopped, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the release method is taught during the period in which the release operation is possible. In other words, it is possible for the player to know the release method at the timing when the player wants to know it, which is convenient for the player.

In the above configuration, the first notification (notification for canceling operation) is performed in the game following the game in which the reach number is stopped, but it may be performed in a game after that, if necessary. may be executed before the execution timing of the freeze effect, that is, during the period when the freeze effect can be canceled.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the manner of notifying the cancellation method of the freeze effect is different from that in the first modified example. In the above modification 1, it is possible to teach the player how to cancel by executing the first notification. There is a concern that the attractiveness of the freeze production of inviting will be lost.

Therefore, in this modified example, the first notification is performed not only when the ready-to-win game stops, but also in a situation where the execution of the freeze effect is not set. Specifically, in a situation where the execution of the freeze effect is not set, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the first notification, and when the result of the lottery is the winning result, the first notification Configure to run.

According to such a configuration, since the first notification is executed even during the normal game, the execution of the freeze effect is not uniquely determined by the execution of the first notification. Thereby, even if the first notification is executed when the ready-to-win number is stopped (when the execution of the freeze effect is set), it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming a prior notification of the execution of the freeze effect. In other words, according to this modification, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of how to cancel the freeze effect while suppressing the effect of the freeze effect from deteriorating.

The mode of the first notification in this modified example is not particularly limited, such as being the same as in the case of the first modified example. However, the frequency of execution of the first notification is generally higher than in the case of Modification 1, which may make the player feel annoyed. Considering this point, it is preferable to reduce the display size (for example, to teach the canceling method by displaying a telop) so as to make it inconspicuous. This makes it possible to prevent the first notification from becoming annoying, or to reduce the annoyance.

In addition, the first notification under the condition that the execution of the freeze effect is set and the first notification under the condition that the execution of the freeze effect is not set share the notification mode, and the player selects both. It is preferable to have a non-identifiable configuration. By adopting such a configuration, it is avoided that the execution of the freeze effect can be detected from the difference in the notification mode, and the first notification when the execution of the freeze effect is set functions as an advance notice of the freeze effect. It becomes possible to further suppress the inconvenience.

It should be noted that the first notification may not be executed in a situation where the execution of the freeze effect is set, and the first notification may be executed only when the execution of the freeze effect is not set. According to this, the first notification does not lead to the execution of the freeze effect. That is, even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first notification from becoming a prior notification of execution of the freeze effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the execution mode of the first notification is different from that of the second embodiment and its modified examples.

For example, when the adjustment switch 59 is operated for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect during the validity period of medal return, medal return processing is executed. In this case, it becomes impossible to bet medals until the return (payout) of the medals is completed, and the game is uselessly interrupted for the player. At this time, not only is the player offended, but the number of games played per unit time is reduced, which may be disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this modification, at least during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the first notification (character display such as "You can release the freeze stock by pressing the settlement switch" ) is not executed. For example, if the predetermined period during which the first notification is executed is the period of one game before the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, a waiting period (game pause period) immediately before the game is started, As for the standby period from the end of the game to the start of the next game, the first notification is not executed.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the operation of the payment switch 59 for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect during the period in which the medal return processing is executed when the payment switch 59 is operated. In addition, it is assumed that the player reflexively operates the settlement switch 59 in response to the first notification, but even if such an operation is performed, the medal return processing based on the operation is executed. can be suppressed. In other words, according to this configuration, occurrence of unintended medal return processing for the player due to the first notification is suppressed, which is inconvenient that the player feels offended and the time efficiency of the game is lowered. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of

If the predetermined period during which the first notification is executed is set to two games or more, the first notification is temporarily executed during the waiting period between the game in which the execution of the first notification is started and the next game. After that, after the next game is started, the first notification may be resumed.

In addition, in the above modification 2, the first notification is executed even when the execution of the freeze effect is not set. During the standby period between games), the first notification may not be executed. This is because it is possible to prevent the player from operating the settlement switch 59 at the temptation of the first notification and executing unnecessary medal return processing.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the period in which execution of the freeze effect can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 is different from that in the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, even if the settlement switch 59 is pressed during a period when the game is not running, the execution of the set freeze effect is not canceled. Regardless of whether or not, if the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation in which the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the freeze effect is always canceled. In this case, it is possible not to limit the period during which the freeze effect can be canceled, but if the settlement switch 59 is operated while the game is not being executed, not only the freeze effect is canceled but also the medal return processing is executed. become. In this case, it becomes impossible to bet medals until the return (payout) of the medals is completed, and the start of the next game is greatly delayed for the player.

Therefore, in this modified example, as in the third modified example, at least during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the checkout switch 59 is operated, the first notification ("When the checkout switch is pressed, the freeze stock You can cancel it.”) is not executed. For example, if the predetermined period during which the first notification is executed is the period of one game before the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, a waiting period (game pause period) immediately before the game is started, As for the standby period from the end of the game to the start of the next game, the first notification is not executed.

That is, in this configuration, the freeze effect can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 at all times, and the first notification prompting the operation of the settlement switch 59 is limited to the period in which the medal return processing is not executed. and As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of the adjustment switch 59 for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the adjustment switch 59 is operated.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above embodiments in that the freeze effect can be executed even when the freeze effect cancellation operation is performed.

In the first embodiment, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled (invalidated) by stopping the specific reach number. In this case, the winning of the BB or VB mode can be grasped based on the stop of the ready-to-win game, and the execution of the freeze effect is canceled at the same time. This eliminates the need for a separate operation and is convenient. However, even if a player who does not want to cancel the freeze effect accidentally stops a specific reach eye (unintentionally performs a release operation), the execution of the freeze effect is immediately canceled. be. In other words, an event may occur in which the execution of the freeze effect is canceled even though the player has no intention of canceling it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so as to suppress unintended cancellation for the player without impairing the convenience for the player who does not want the execution of the freeze effect. The configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

FIG. 90(a) is a flowchart showing reel control processing (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment. The processing of steps S5001 and S5002 in FIG. 90(a) is executed in place of the freeze releasing processing of step S414 in the reel control processing of FIG.

After executing the payout determination process in step S413, the freeze release process is performed in step S5001. Here, the freeze release processing in step S5001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90(b).

In the freeze release process, first, the processes of steps S5101 to S5105 are executed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S3501 to S3504 and S3507 in the freeze release process of FIG. Briefly describing the processing of steps S5101 to S5105, in step S5101, it is determined whether any freeze flag is set (whether the execution of the freeze effect is set), and if the affirmative determination is made In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0 (whether or not the freeze effect is being executed). If the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the reach eye has stopped. In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a specific reach eye (reach eye A or reach eye B) is stopped. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103 (if a specific reach number is stopped), it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag is set. Further, if the specific reach number is not stopped, it is determined whether or not the eleventh replay (special replay functioning as a reach number corresponding to the VB mode winning in the attack mode) has been won in step S5105. determine whether If negative determinations are made in steps S5101, S5102, S5104, and S5105, this freeze releasing process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104 or step S5105, a freeze release flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S5106. The freeze release flag is a flag indicating that a freeze effect release operation has been performed. That is, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, stopping a specific reach number is the cancellation operation of the freeze effect.

In the following step S5107, the release operation command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this freeze release processing is terminated. The release operation command is a command for notifying that the freeze effect release operation has been performed, and the display control device 81 receives the release operation command to notify that the freeze effect release operation has been performed. can grasp.

Returning to the description of FIG. 90(a), after executing the freeze release processing in step S5001, the freeze return processing is executed in step S5002, and then the winning result corresponding processing in step S414 (FIG. 78) is executed. do. The freeze release processing will be described later in detail.

Next, timer interrupt processing (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91(a). The process of step S5201 in FIG. 91(a) is executed between the process of step S108 and the process of step S109 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

After step S108 (timer subtraction process) is executed, in step S5201, a settlement switch corresponding process is executed to determine whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. After executing the process, the process of step S109 (the process of outputting the count result such as the number of bets to the external centralized terminal board 121) is executed.

Here, the settlement switch correspondence processing in step S5201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91(b). In this process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated based on the detection signal of the settlement detection sensor 59a (FIG. 12). If it is determined that the settlement switch 59 has been operated, it is determined in step S5302 whether or not the game is being executed. If it is determined that the game is being executed, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not a freeze release flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG.

The freeze release flag is set when the release operation is performed after the execution of the freeze effect is set and before the freeze effect is executed. It means that a specific reach number has stopped after the execution of the effect is set. In this case, the process advances to step S5304 to set a return operation flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. This return operation flag indicates that an operation for returning the execution of the canceled freeze effect, in other words, an operation for canceling the release operation has been performed. After execution of step S5304, or when a negative determination is made in steps S5301 and S5303, this settlement switch handling process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, it means that the settlement switch 59 has been operated while the game is not being executed. A return flag is set, and then this settlement switch handling process is terminated. The medal return flag indicates that medal return processing should be executed. If the flag is set, it is determined in the sensor monitoring process of step S107 (FIG. 12) that the settlement operation has been performed (the settlement switch 59 has been operated for the purpose of settlement), and the credited virtual Execute medal return processing for paying out the same number of medals. Note that the medal return flag is cleared when the medal return processing is completed.

Next, the freeze recovery processing of step S5002 (FIG. 90(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92(a).

In the freeze recovery process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the freeze cancellation flag (step S5106 in FIG. 90(b)) is set. If the freeze release flag is set, the process advances to step S5402 to determine whether or not the return operation flag (step S5304 in FIG. 91(b)) is set. If the return operation flag is set, in step S5403 the set release operation flag and return operation flag are cleared. In the following step S5404, the return operation command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this freeze return processing is terminated. The return operation command is a command for notifying that a return operation of the canceled freeze effect, in other words, a cancel operation of canceling the freeze effect has been performed, and the display control device 81 receives the return operation command. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the freeze effect will be executed. After execution of step S5404 or when a negative determination is made in step S5401, this freeze recovery processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402 (if the freeze release operation flag is set and the return operation flag is not set), the flow advances to step S5405 to determine whether the value of the freeze counter FC is 1. judge. Since the freeze counter FC corresponds to the number of games remaining until the specific game (the game in which the freeze effect is executed), this step determines whether or not the current game is substantially the game immediately before the specific game. becomes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, the set freeze flag and freeze counter FC are cleared in step S5406. When the freeze flag is cleared in this manner, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in the rotation effect processing (FIG. 76), so the freeze effect is no longer executed. That is, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled.

In the subsequent step S5407, a freeze release command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. The freeze release command indicates that the execution of the freeze effect has been released, and the display control device 81 can recognize that the freeze effect has been released by receiving the freeze release command. . After execution of step S5407 or when a negative determination is made in step S5405, this freeze recovery processing is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the operation to cancel the freeze effect is performed, if the return operation is not performed until the previous game, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled in the previous game (see FIG. 92 ( b) see). That is, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled immediately when the release operation is performed, but the execution of the freeze effect is canceled after the elapse of the period in which the return operation is possible. On the other hand, after the operation to cancel the freeze effect is performed, if the return operation is performed up to the previous game, the freeze effect is executed in the specific game as originally set without canceling the freeze effect (FIG. 92 ( c) see). That is, no special processing for restoring the freeze effect is performed, and control is performed so that the freeze effect is executed with the original settings.

In the above configuration, the period during which the return operation can be performed is up to the previous game, but it is not limited to this. It can be set to any period, such as until it is completed. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the freeze effect is performed in the middle of the specific game, the effective period of the return operation may be the time immediately before the execution timing of the freeze effect in the specific game.

Next, effect setting processing (processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Incidentally, the processing of steps S5501 to S5506 of FIG. 93 is performed when a negative determination is made in step S2009 in the effect setting processing of FIG. 51 or after execution of step S2010.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009 (if the command received from the main control unit 101 does not include a full stop command) or after executing the processing of step S2010 (all stop effect setting processing), the process proceeds to step S5501. Then, it is determined whether or not the command received from main controller 101 includes a release operation command (step S5107 in FIG. 90).

If the release operation command is included, it means that the release operation was performed after the execution of the freeze effect was set but before the freeze effect was executed. set to run. The cancellation notification is notification for teaching that the freeze effect has been canceled and how to cancel it (method to invalidate the cancellation). When execution of the notification is set, for example, characters such as "The freeze stock has been released. If you want to cancel the freeze release, press the checkout switch." As a result, the player can know that the execution of the freeze effect has been canceled regardless of whether it is an intentional canceling operation, and can know how to cancel it.

In the above step S5502, setting is made so that the release notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, one game). It should be noted that the release notification (the notification prompting the operation of the settlement switch 59) is, as in the third modification of the second embodiment, at least during the period in which the medal return processing is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated. should not be executed.

After execution of step S5502 or if a negative determination is made in step S5501, the process advances to step S5503 to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 101 includes a return operation command (step S5404 in FIG. 92). . If the return operation command is included, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not release notification is being executed. If the release notification is being executed, in step S5505, end setting is performed to end the execution of the release notification.

After execution of step S5505 or when a negative determination is made in step S5506, setting is made so that return notification is executed in step S5506. The return notification is for notifying that the cancellation of the freeze effect has been canceled, and when the execution of the notification is set, for example, a character display such as "Freeze release has been canceled" on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. is done. After executing step S5506, the process advances to step S2011 to execute other processing. In step S2011, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

<Game Flow Regarding Freeze Effects>
Next, the game flow regarding the freeze effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the execution of the freeze effect is set in association with the winning of the BB. Note that the description of the same parts as those in each of the above embodiments will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when a BB win is made in a certain game, execution of a freeze effect is set with a predetermined probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game after a predetermined number of games from the game. Note that, in the present embodiment, the notification corresponding to the setting of the execution of the freeze effect is not executed as in the first embodiment.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94(b), when the freeze effect cancellation operation is performed in the game prior to the specific game (when the player stops a specific reach number), the cancellation notification is given. It is executed to teach that the freeze effect has been canceled and how to cancel it. After that, as shown in FIG. 94(c), if the player operates the settlement switch 59 before the game immediately before the specific game ends, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game. is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94(d), if the player does not operate the settlement switch 59 before the end of the previous game, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled and the freeze effect is not executed in the specific game. will not be executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

After the execution of the freeze effect is set, the specific ready-to-win number is stopped, and thereafter, when the settlement switch 59 is operated by the execution timing of the freeze effect, the set freeze effect is executed and the specific reach is performed. The set freeze performance is not executed when the adjustment switch 59 is not operated by the execution timing of the freeze performance after the eyes stop.

According to the above configuration, a player who does not want to execute the freeze effect can cancel the execution of the freeze effect by stopping the specific reach number. In other words, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for canceling, which is convenient for the player who wants to avoid the freeze effect. On the other hand, a player who accidentally stops a specific ready-to-win game regardless of his desire to execute the freeze performance can execute the freeze performance by operating the settlement switch 59. - 特許庁That is, it becomes possible to cancel the cancellation of the freeze effect. Thus, according to this configuration, it is possible to help a player who has unintentionally performed a release operation without impairing the convenience of the player who does not want the execution of the freeze effect.

When a specific reach number is stopped (when a release operation is performed), if the adjustment switch 59 is not operated before the period in which the return operation is possible after that, the execution of the set freeze effect is released, If the adjustment switch 59 is operated before the elapse of the period in which the return operation is possible, the execution of the freeze performance is not canceled.

For example, when the release operation is performed, the freeze effect release process is executed once, and when the return operation is performed after that, the cancellation process and the invalidation process are executed. There is a need to. In this regard, in this configuration, when the return operation is performed after the release operation is performed, neither the release processing nor the invalidation processing is performed, and it is sufficient to maintain the initial execution settings as they are. Therefore, the processing load required for control processing can be significantly reduced. In addition, although release processing is necessary when a return operation is not performed after a release operation is performed, invalidation processing itself is not executed, so a configuration for that can be omitted. Therefore, it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

In addition, in the configuration where the freeze effect is canceled once and the release is invalidated by executing the return operation, when the release is invalidated (when the freeze effect is restored), the setting made at the time of winning the BB (execution timing of the freeze effect etc.) will arise, and countermeasures will be required. In this regard, in this configuration, when the return operation is performed after the release operation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the freeze performance according to the setting made when the BB is won, so the above problem does not occur and the configuration is simple. be able to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from each of the above-described embodiments in terms of execution conditions and execution mode of the freeze effect. First, the freeze effect according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, a fifth freeze effect and a sixth freeze effect are set as freeze effects, and each of these freeze effects is set as a rotation effect performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. When each freeze effect is executed, when the starting operation of the start lever 41 is performed in a situation where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, first, the normal rotation direction (positive direction, downward direction, revolving direction ) by a predetermined angle in the opposite direction. In this embodiment, the predetermined angle is the angle by which one pattern is displaced by one frame. ) is set as an angle (approximately 15 degrees). After rotating in the reverse direction by a predetermined angle, the state of being temporarily stopped at that position is maintained for a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 sec). As described above, since the predetermined angle is set to be smaller than the angle at which one pattern is shifted by one frame, each pattern is arranged at a position shifted from the effective line when the game is paused. By doing so, even if the player misses the reverse rotation, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the shifted state.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of angles may be provided as the predetermined angle, and the angle that is likely to be selected may differ depending on the effect. Also, a plurality of types of periods in which the angle is maintained at a predetermined angle may be provided, and the periods that are likely to be selected may differ depending on the presentation. Furthermore, these angles and periods may be combined and applied to effects, or may be configured to pause at a plurality of types of angles in stages.

In the fifth freeze performance, after rotating backward by the predetermined angle and temporarily stopping, when a predetermined period elapses, the game machine is further rotated reversely and then temporarily stopped in a state in which "red 7" patterns are aligned on a predetermined line. After that, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control, and the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. That is, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop based on the stop operation, and the symbols corresponding to the game result of the current game stop on the activated line.

On the other hand, in the sixth freeze effect, after rotating backward by the predetermined angle and temporarily stopping, after a predetermined period of time has passed, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control. After that, based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the symbols corresponding to the game result of the current game are stopped on the activated line.

The fifth freeze effect and the sixth freeze effect have different execution conditions (occurrence triggers). Execution conditions for each freeze effect will be described later in detail.

Next, control processing of the main controller 101 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a flow chart showing the BB winning process, and (b) is a flow chart showing the first special combination process. 74 and the first special combination process shown in FIG. 33 are shown in these figures.

In the BB winning process, if affirmative determination is made in step S3206 (determining whether or not the number of precursor games is greater than 0), the fifth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S6101. do. The fifth freeze flag corresponds to the fifth freeze effect in FIG. 95, and by setting the flag, execution of the fifth freeze effect is set.

That is, the fifth freeze effect, like the various freeze effects in each of the above embodiments, is generated by the opportunity corresponding to the winning of the BB role. It is executed when the execution of the freeze effect is won. It should be noted that the fifth freeze flag may be set in step S3304 (FIG. 76) and the fifth freeze effect may be executed when VB is won, not limited to when the BB is won.

After execution of step S6101, the process advances to step S3211 (FIG. 74) to set the freeze counter FC in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. The freeze counter FC determines the number of games to be played from the BB win to the execution of the freeze performance, in other words, the number of games after the BB win to execute the freeze performance.

Next, the first specific role processing will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b).

After executing the BB winning process in step S814 in the first specific role process, the sixth freeze effect process is executed in step S6201. As shown in FIG. 97, in the sixth freeze effect processing, first, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the premonitory game is in progress. In steps S810 to S813 and steps S820 to S823 of FIG. 33, the number of premonitory games has already been set, and if the period is still in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, and the sixth freeze effect processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6301 and the precursor game is not in progress, the process advances to step S6302 to perform rare roles such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B (BB from the player's point of view). It is determined whether or not the player wins the single role with the possibility of duplication. This determination is made based on the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 in step S308 (FIG. 16).

If it is determined in step S6302 that the rare combination has been won, in step S6303, a lottery process in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo omen mode makes it appear as if the player has shifted to the omen mode. That is, in the omen mode, when the number of omen games is completed, the player is notified of a favorable result (BB winning, etc.), whereas in the pseudo omen mode, it is difficult to distinguish from the omen mode visually. However, when the number of pseudo precursory games is completed, the mode ends without informing the player of an advantageous result.

In step S6303, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106 to determine whether or not the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. hold a lottery. In the table for the pseudo-omen mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-omen mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of rare hand that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in omen mode is high.

In step S6304, based on the processing result of step S6303, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo-prediction mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S6305, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. In such a process, one of the predetermined number of games (eg, 1 to 20 games) is randomly determined by lottery. However, 0 games are not selected in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games.

In the subsequent step S6306, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S6305 is input to the pseudo precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 to set the number of pseudo precursor games. Similar to the precursor counter, the pseudo precursor counter is decremented by 1 at step S1506 of the number-of-games management process (FIG. 46), that is, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

In the subsequent step S6307, the sixth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM106. The sixth freeze flag corresponds to the sixth freeze effect of FIG. 95, and by setting the flag, execution of the sixth freeze effect is set. That is, the sixth freeze effect is generated by the opportunity corresponding to the winning of the rare role. Specifically, although the BB role has not been won, the rare role has been won, and the lottery process of the pseudo omen mode in step S6305 has won. is executed if

In the subsequent step S6308, the freeze counter FC is set in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and then in step S6309, processing for setting the freeze stock command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The freeze stock command includes information indicating that the execution of the freeze effect is set in advance, the type of freeze effect to be executed, and the number of games after which the freeze effect will be executed.

In subsequent step S6310, a process of setting the pseudo precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The pseudo sign command includes information on the number of pseudo sign games. After execution of step S6310, if a negative determination is made in step S6302 or step S6304, the sixth freeze effect processing is terminated.

Next, control processing of the display control device 81 (sub-side control device) in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the process for notifying the shift trigger role. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those of the process for informing the transition opportunity in FIG. 60, and the description thereof will be omitted. 98 differs from the transition opportunity notification process of FIG. 60 only in that the processes of steps S6401 to S6403 are added.

The transition opportunity notification process is executed when it is determined in step S2204 (FIG. 53) that the transition opportunity is won. Here, as described above, the transition triggers are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak Watermelon duplication 1, Chance A duplication 1, Chance B duplication 1, Middle bell duplication 1, Special reply A duplication 1, Special reply A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB correspond, rare of step S6302 (Fig. 97) role is included.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the transition trigger role notification process, if the determination process of step S2806 (the process of determining whether or not a bonus is won) is negative, the process proceeds to step S6401, and the start received this time It is determined whether or not a pseudo portent command is included as an hour command. If a pseudo portent command is included, the process advances to step S6402 to set a pseudo flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and then terminate the notification process for transition trigger role.

On the other hand, if the pseudo precursor command is not included, the flow advances to step S6403 to determine whether or not a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. If the pseudo flag is set, the process for notifying the shift trigger role is terminated, while if the pseudo flag is not set, the processing of steps S2807 to S2812 is executed.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 101 executes the transition processing to the pseudo precursor mode and the execution of the sixth freeze effect is set, the processing after step S2807 (pseudo for addition transition processing to precursor mode) is not executed.

Next, the continuous effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 99, the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as the continuous effect setting processing of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. If no portent command is included, the flow advances to step S6501 to determine whether or not a pseudo portent command is included in the starting command currently received.

If it is determined in step S2901 that the portent command is included, or if it is determined in step S6501 that the pseudo portent command is included, in step S2902, the number of portent games in the portent mode included in the portent command is determined. Alternatively, the number of pseudo portent games in the pseudo portent mode included in the pseudo portent command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (remaining 4 games), the continuous performance is started. After performing the process of step S2902, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2903.

When negative determination is made in step S6501, or after executing the process of step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904, and it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect.

When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2908 to acquire the effect table for this portent from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2909, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2910 to acquire a pseudo portent effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo omens and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for pseudo omens includes effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue until the next game. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

After performing the processing of step S2909 or step S2911, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2912. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2913. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906 or step S2912, or after performing the process of step S2913, this continuous effect setting process is terminated.

Next, the all-stop effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 is different from the effect setting process at all stop of FIG. 58 only in that the processes of steps S6601 to S6603 are added.

In step S2617, it is determined whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stopping command. If the bonus end command is not included, it is determined in step S6601 whether or not the freeze release command is included as the currently received stop command. When the freeze release command is included, in step S6602, bonus notification processing for setting bonus notification effects is executed. In the bonus notification effect, for example, the characters "V BONUS" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "bonus").

In the subsequent step S6603, effect data is set so as to change the effect image in the fourth game. Specifically, similarly to the above embodiments, the effect data is set so that the winning image is displayed without displaying the image of FIG. 68(a). After execution of step S6603 or when a negative determination is made in step S6601, the process advances to step S2619 to execute processing for addition notification at the time of all stops.

<About the game flow>
A description will be given of the flow of the game when the continuous performance is executed. First, the case where the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a case where 4 games are set as the number of games for continuous effect will be described.

As already explained, in the 1st to 3rd games of the continuous effect, images of the main character attacking the enemy character are displayed as shown in FIGS. 101(a1) and (a2). Then, when the continuous effect is executed with the BB winning or VB winning as a trigger, the fifth freeze effect is executed in the fourth game (the final game of the continuous effect), and the winning image (a3) is displayed. By displaying the winning image in this way, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that he or she has won an advantageous result (here, BB or VB).

On the other hand, if the continuous effect is triggered by winning a rare combination, the sixth freeze effect is executed in the fourth game, and a defeat image (a4) is displayed. By displaying the image, it becomes possible for the technician to recognize that he/she has not won an advantageous result.

In this way, by executing the freeze effect when notifying the result of the final game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect can be favorably livened up. In the fifth freeze effect, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled to rotate in the reverse direction by a predetermined angle and then rotate in the reverse direction to temporarily stop when the "red 7" symbols are aligned. On the other hand, in the sixth freeze effect, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are driven and controlled so as to rotate in the forward direction after rotating in the reverse direction by a predetermined angle. That is, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R operate differently in both freeze effects, and the freeze effects themselves are provided with a notification function for notifying whether or not the player wins. Therefore, when each freeze effect is executed, the player's interest in which operation mode each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R operates is heightened, and the degree of attention to the freeze effect can be preferably increased. Become.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the case where the execution of the freeze effect is canceled in the middle of the continuous effect will be described. Here, a case will be described in which a BB win is made in a certain game, and the execution of the fifth freeze effect and the continuous effect is set with that as a trigger.

While the 1st to 3rd games of the continuous effect are being executed (until the game immediately before the 4th game ends), when the player stops a specific reach eye (reach eye A or reach eye B) ( In a2), canceling processing is performed so that the fifth freeze effect is not executed in the fourth game. At the same time, the auxiliary display section 65 executes a bonus notification effect for notifying the player of the BB winning (a3). In the bonus notification effect, a bonus notification image 201 with characters "V BONUS" displayed is displayed.

The bonus notification image 201 is displayed immediately after the specific reach number is stopped, that is, in the game in which the specific reach number is stopped. Also, when the bonus notification effect is executed in the middle of the first to third games (for example, when it is performed in the second game), the bonus notification image 202 is displayed in the subsequent games as well (a4). However, the bonus notification video 202 is displayed in a smaller display size than the initial bonus notification video 201, and is displayed so as to be superimposed on the continuous effect video at a predetermined location (for example, corner) of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65. . Therefore, the player can view the bonus notification image 202 while viewing the image of the continuous effect executed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

Then, in the fourth game, the victory image (a5) is displayed without executing the fifth freeze effect. In this case, the winning image is displayed without displaying the image of FIG. 68(a).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled by stopping the specific reach number. For this reason, when the rare role winning (bonus non-winning) is used as a trigger, the shift processing to the pseudo sign mode is executed, and when the continuous effect is executed, the ready-to-win number, which is the release condition of the freeze effect, does not stop. That is, when the execution of the sixth freeze effect is set with the winning of the rare combination (non-winning of the bonus) as a trigger, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled.

As described above, in the configuration in which the freeze effect is executed not only when the bonus is won, but also in the situation where the bonus is not won, after the trigger for executing the freeze effect occurs, when the reach eyes stop before the execution of the freeze effect is configured to release the execution of the freeze effect (freeze performed at the time of bonus winning). That is, at least in the case of the result desired by the player (bonus winning result), when it is assumed that the player perceives the result in advance, the freeze effect is not executed. For example, while the player is recognizing or predicting bonus winning from the stop of the reach eye, if the freeze effect is executed overlapping with the stop of the reach eye, the player may feel annoyed, but this implementation According to the embodiment, the occurrence of such duplication of implementation is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who has previously recognized the winning of the bonus, from feeling annoyed by the freeze effect, while the game effect is livened up by the freeze effect.

When the specific ready-to-win is stopped (when the execution of the fifth freeze performance is canceled), the performance for bonus notification is executed to notify the player that the bonus is won internally. In this case, for example, even if the player does not know the reach number or does not notice the stop of the reach number, after informing the player of the bonus winning by the bonus notification effect, the fifth freeze effect is executed. can be released. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the cancellation of the execution of the fifth freeze effect even though the player does not recognize or predict the winning of the bonus.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the freeze effect is set, the notification to that effect (preliminary notification of the freeze effect execution) is not executed, but the notification may be performed. In this case, after the player recognizes that the freeze effect will be executed, it is possible to perform the operation to cancel the freeze effect.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of types of freeze effects are targeted for release, but a configuration in which only one type of freeze effect can be released may be employed. In addition, although the configuration is such that a part of the freeze effect (the third freeze effect) is not released, it may be configured such that all the freeze effects can be released.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the third freeze effect is not uniformly released, but it may be canceled or not depending on the lottery result of the role lottery. For example, in the case of only BB winning, the execution of the third freeze production is canceled in response to the cancellation operation, and if the attack mode is also won along with the BB winning, the third freeze production is performed even if the cancellation operation is performed. The configuration is such that the execution of is not canceled. In this case, when the freeze effect is executed despite the player's canceling operation, double winning of the BB and the attack mode is confirmed, and the interest is improved.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the ease with which the freeze effect (the third freeze effect or the first to third freeze effects) is released when the release operation is performed may be varied depending on the set value. A player can use whether or not the freeze performance is canceled for setting speculation, and it is possible to provide an amusement that is not limited to the simple cancellation of the freeze performance. In this case, when the release operation is performed, a release lottery is performed to determine whether or not to release the freeze effect, and the freeze effect is canceled with a predetermined probability, and the release probability at that time may differ depending on the set value. . In addition, when winning the BB, a lottery is conducted to determine whether a specific reach number (a reach number that triggers cancellation) can be stopped, and when the lottery is won and the specific reach number is stopped, the freeze effect is canceled. At that time, the lottery probability (winning probability that enables stopping of the specific reach) may differ depending on the set value.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of executing (selecting) a specific freeze effect (for example, the third freeze effect) among a plurality of freeze effects may differ depending on the set value. For example, with high settings or some set values, the execution probability of a specific freeze effect is higher than other set values. In such a configuration, for example, when the player has already seen the setting value from other effects, etc., there may be a need to avoid the execution of the freeze effect so that the other player does not know the setting value. In such a case, the configuration that can avoid execution of the freeze effect can be configured to meet the needs of the player.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the execution of the freeze effect is set in advance, and then, when the cancellation condition is met before the execution of the effect, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. is not limited to the freezing effect, and may be a winning effect (a effect that allows the player to grasp the BB win or its carry-over state) executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In other words, when the ready-to-win number is stopped by the player's operation, the above-mentioned winning performance is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the duplication of the fixed performance due to the stop of the ready-to-win number and the above-mentioned winning performance. Incidentally, instead of or in addition to the hit-probability effect, a structure may be adopted in which the player cancels the effect that allows the player to predict the BB win or its carry-over state.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, if the 11th replay combination is won while the VB mode is being won, the pressing order notification is not performed, and the 11th replay combination is not won in the VB mode. However, if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is won, the 11th replay role is announced. It is also possible to notify the pressing order in which the game role can be won, and not to notify the pressing order when the 11th replay role is won in a situation where the VB mode is not won. At that time, in addition to the notification of the pressing order, it may be configured to teach that the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the indicated pressing order.

In addition, when the 11th re-game role is won while the VB mode is won, there is a push order that does not allow the 11th re-play role to be won, and a push order that allows the 11th re-game role to be won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player selects and operates which one to follow (whether to cancel the freeze effect). At that time, it is preferable that the notification mode (for example, display color) of each notification is made different so that the player can recognize which one corresponds to the cancellation.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, each time the execution of the freeze effect is set, the freeze effect is executed unless the player cancels the operation, but when the player performs the cancel operation, that effect is stored. However, the configuration may be such that automatic release is performed based on the history. For example, if the player performs the cancellation operation continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), or if the ratio of the number of cancellations to the set number of times of execution of the freeze production exceeds a predetermined ratio, etc., the freeze production It is assumed that the player is a player who does not want execution, and the freeze performance is automatically canceled (or the freeze performance execution setting itself is not performed) even if there is no release operation for the freeze performance thereafter. According to this, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the releasing operation.

However, there is a risk that such an automatic release setting will be passed on to the next player as it is, and that player will not be able to see the freeze effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set a reset condition (such as a game not being executed for a predetermined period of time), and clear the automatic cancellation setting when the condition is met.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the execution or continuation of the continuous effect may be canceled when the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled. For example, when the total number of games of the continuous effect is 4 games, when a specific ready-to-reach number is stopped in the second game and the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, the continuous effect after the third game is not executed. can be configured. In this case, the bonus notification image 201 of the fourth embodiment may be displayed, and the display may be continued until the pattern combination corresponding to BB or the like stops at the effective position or until the bonus game or the like is started. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect image other than the bonus notification image 201 is displayed.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the specific reach eye, which is the condition for canceling the freeze effect, is the reach eye A or the reach eye B, but among the reach eyes, the stop operation is performed by a specific operation mode (DDT hitting method). The specific reach number may be a reach number that is unstoppable when the game is stopped and can be stopped when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode (operation timing) different from the specific operation mode. For example, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which reach stitch B is set as a specific reach stitch and reach stitch A is not set as a specific reach stitch. According to this configuration, the player consciously does not stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R accidentally while performing the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the player does not miss a winning combination. The execution of the freeze effect can be canceled by stopping the stopped ready-to-win number. In other words, it is assumed that the latter reach eye is highly likely to have detected the bonus winning by the player due to the stop of the reach eye, so it is possible to cancel the execution of the freeze effect by stopping the reach eye. , the execution of the freeze effect can be canceled in a situation where the player is likely to recognize or predict the winning of the bonus.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to reach eyes (strong reach eyes, such as reach eye A or reach eye B, etc.) that can be stopped only in the case of BB winning, etc. It is also possible to provide a combination of symbols (weak reach or chance) that can be stopped both in the case of non-win). In this configuration, when BB or the like is won and the execution of the freeze performance is set, the execution of the freeze performance is canceled when the strong reach eye stops, and the freeze performance is performed when the weak reach eye stops. A configuration that does not cancel the execution is preferable. According to such a configuration, by further providing the weak reach, the chances that the player can expect a BB win or the like are increased, and the interest is improved. In addition, since the execution of the freeze effect is canceled only in the case of a strong reach, it is possible to prevent the freeze effect from being executed in a situation where the player can clearly grasp the BB win, etc. It is possible to suppress only canceling the freeze effect even though there is no freeze effect.

In addition, as a configuration having the weak reach, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a predetermined operation timing without being triggered by the winning of a specific role (rare role, etc.), the corresponding weak reach is performed. It is conceivable to drive and control the respective reels 32L to 32R so that the symbol combinations are stopped at valid positions. In addition, when a specific combination other than BB or VB is won, the game may be stopped in the winning game or in the subsequent game. In addition, it may be configured such that the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when either the strong reach eye or the weak reach eye is stopped.

(12) In the above-described first to third embodiments, a bonus notification effect may be executed as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Specifically, after setting the freeze effect, when a specific reach eye stops before the execution of the effect (when an operation that triggers the cancellation of the freeze effect is performed), a configuration for executing the bonus notification effect and With such a configuration, even if the player does not notice the stop of the ready-to-win, for example, it is possible to cancel the execution of the freeze effect after informing the player that the BB win or the like has been won. . In other words, it is possible to preferably prevent the execution of the freeze effect from being canceled even though the player does not recognize the BB winning or the like.

Note that the bonus notification effect may be performed when the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, or may be performed when the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. Further, in each embodiment, instead of the bonus informing effect, a reach-indicating effect for informing that the ready-to-win has stopped may be executed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the freeze effect is generated at the start of the game, but may be generated during execution of the game (in the middle of the game). In this case, in the game in which the freeze effect is executed, if the reach eye stops by the execution timing of the freeze effect, the freeze effect may not be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the freeze effect is not executed if the ready-to-win number stops before the predetermined period of time retroactively from the execution timing.

(14) In the above-described first embodiment, when a specific reach number is stopped, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, but the execution of the freeze effect can be recognized or predicted by the player. When executed by the unit 65 or the like, it may be configured to cancel the execution of the freeze effect. For example, regardless of whether the execution of the freeze effect is set or not, the player performs a predetermined operation to set the cancellation of the freeze effect, and then the freeze effect is executed. is executed, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when the player can recognize or predict the effect (for example, the effect of displaying characters such as "Freeze is stocked"). According to such a configuration, the player who desires the freeze effect can understand that the freeze effect has been canceled by not executing the freeze effect even though the execution has been set. can be done. In other words, it can be used as an opportunity to clear the cancellation setting. Note that such a configuration can also be applied to the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

(15) In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a special reach number that can stop only the BB winning game is provided. In this case, when the special ready-to-win number stops in the BB winning game, the execution of the freezing effect is canceled, and even if other ready-to-win numbers stop in the game after the BB winning game and before the specific game, the freezing effect is continued. It may be configured not to be released. Conversely, even if the special reach number is stopped in the BB winning game, the freeze effect is not canceled, and the reach number other than the special reach number or the special reach number is not canceled in the game after the BB winning game and before the specific game. The freeze performance may be canceled when a specific reach number among the reach numbers is stopped. The same applies to the first-stage and second-stage operations in the second embodiment, and the release operation and return operation (cancel operation) in the third embodiment.

(16) In the above-described first embodiment, the first reach and the second reach having a higher stop difficulty level are provided, and when the second reach is stopped, the freeze effect is canceled, while the first reach is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the freeze effect is not released even if the reach number is stopped. Further, the freeze effect may be canceled by stopping the game only once for the second reach, and the freeze effect may be canceled for the first reach when the game is stopped twice or more. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a cancellation operation with a high operation difficulty level is regarded as having been operated with the player's intention to cancel it, and is weighted more heavily than an operation with a low operation difficulty level. The same applies to the first-stage and second-stage operations in the second embodiment, and the release operation and return operation (cancel operation) in the third embodiment.

(17) In the above-described first embodiment, a part of the symbol that stops at the effective position may overlap between the ready-to-win pattern that is the release operation and the ready-to-reach pattern that is not. For example, in each reach pattern, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M have the same stop pattern forming the reach pattern, and only the right reel 32R has a different stop pattern. In this case, when the player stops the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the player perceives that the reach number will stop (BB winning or its carry-over state), and stops the reach number that is the cancellation operation. It is possible to select whether or not (whether or not the freeze effect is released) with the right reel 32R. In addition, when two reels (for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M) or one reel (for example, the left reel 32L) are stopped, a reach eye is set, and when the player stops the remaining reels It may be possible to select whether or not to stop the rolled number, which is the cancellation operation, immediately.

(18) In the first embodiment, an operation other than the operation of stopping a specific reach number (for example, pressing and holding the switch for the final stop operation among the stop switches 42 to 44, or moving the start lever 41 in a specific direction). The freeze effect may be canceled by an operation such as moving (upward), an operation of the effect switch 66, or the like. The same applies to the first-stage and second-stage operations in the second embodiment, and the release operation and return operation (cancel operation) in the third embodiment. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the freeze effect is canceled by the effect switch 55, a sensor that detects whether or not the switch 55 is operated is electrically connected to the main control device 101, or the freeze effect is activated by the display control device 81. It is preferable to have a configuration that controls execution.

(19) In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is executed without being released if the release operation is not performed by the specific game (execution timing of the freeze effect). The freeze effect may not be released unless the release operation is performed by a previous predetermined timing (for example, two games before the specific game). Note that such a configuration can also be applied to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. At that time, when applying to the third embodiment, the freeze effect can be canceled if the return operation (cancellation operation for cancellation) is not performed by the predetermined timing.

Further, the execution of the freeze effect may be canceled when the release operation is performed in one or a plurality of predetermined games during the period in which the execution of the freeze effect is set. In this case, the entire period from when the execution of the freeze effect is set until the effect is executed is not subject to operation monitoring, but only part of the game is subject to operation monitoring. For this reason, the player only needs to select whether or not to perform the release operation in some games. You don't have to worry about it. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since only some games are subject to operation monitoring, it is possible to reduce the processing load of control processing.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when a specific reach number (part of the reach number) stops, but the reach number stops regardless of the type of reach number. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when the game is over. However, in the case of a bonus winning state or a carry-over state, a freeze effect is executed in a gaming machine in which the pattern combination corresponding to the reach number is relatively easily stopped without the player being particularly conscious of it. may be overly restrictive. Therefore, in order to ensure the execution opportunity of the freeze effect, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the first embodiment. Note that this also applies to the third embodiment. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the canceling operation by the settlement switch 59 becomes possible when a specific reach number is stopped.

(21) In the above-described first embodiment, when the stop operation is performed (the first operation is performed) at a timing when the reach number does not stop, the preset freeze effect is executed in the specific game, and the reach number It can also be regarded as a configuration in which the execution of the freeze effect is canceled when the stop operation is performed (the second operation is performed) at the timing when the is stopped. In this case, each operation of the first operation and the second operation may be different, and the specific operation mode is not limited to the above. For example, among the stop switches 42 to 44, the operation time of the switch used for the final stop operation may be different (the second operation is a long press), or different operation means may be used. Moreover, each operation of the first operation and the second operation is not limited to a single operation, and may consist of a plurality of operations.

(22) In the first embodiment (modification 1), the configuration is such that the release notification is executed only in a specific case, but the configuration may be such that the release notification is executed each time the release operation is performed. In this case, the player who desires to cancel the freeze effect and performs the cancellation operation can confirm that the cancellation operation has been accepted.

(23) In the first embodiment (modified example 1), when the number of games FG from when the execution of the freeze effect is set to when the release operation is executed is greater than the predetermined number of games, the reach number is stopped. However, instead of such notification, a moving image effect or the like may be executed in which the player can recognize or predict the BB winning or its carryover state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not especially alert|report.

(24) In the first embodiment (modified example 1), if the release operation is performed by a predetermined timing after the execution of the freeze effect is set and before the execution of the freeze effect, the release notification is performed. Instead, if the release operation is performed after the predetermined timing, the release notification may be executed. In such a configuration, when the execution of the release operation is delayed, it is highly likely that the player has performed the operation without knowing the existence of the freeze effect and that the execution can be released, and the release notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately inform the player who has operated without knowing the existence of the freeze effect and that the execution of the freeze effect can be cancelled. On the other hand, if the release operation was performed early, it is highly likely that the user knew and operated the release operation, and the release notification is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed by the notification that he/she knows and has operated.

(25) In the second embodiment, as in the third modification of the first embodiment, an effect that allows the player to recognize the BB winning or its winning state is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After that, the execution of the freeze effect may be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 . In this case, the player can select whether or not to execute the freeze effect after ascertaining the BB winning or the like. For example, a player who has become less interested in the freeze effect and no longer wishes to execute the freeze effect after the BB winning has been found can operate the settlement switch 59 (release operation) after the above effect. , it is possible to avoid the execution of the freeze effect. On the other hand, a player who is highly interested in the freeze effect and wants to see the effect can cause the freeze effect to be executed by not performing the cancellation operation. In such a configuration, the notification for the release operation ("Push the checkout switch to release the freeze stock", etc.) that teaches the release operation may be performed after the above effects are executed in the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. It may be performed during production (simultaneously with the production).

Also in the above-described third embodiment, an effect that allows the player to recognize the BB winning or its winning state is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and the settlement switch 59 is operated by the execution timing of the freezing effect. If not, it may be configured to cancel the freeze effect. Even in this case, the player can select whether or not to execute the freeze effect after ascertaining the BB winning.

(26) In the above-described second embodiment, as in the modification 4 of the above-described first embodiment, instead of canceling the freeze effect, it may be configured to change to another effect. This also applies to the third embodiment.

(27) In the second embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated after the ready-to-win number is stopped, the execution of the freeze effect is uniformly canceled, but after the ready-to-win number stops, the settlement switch is set. Depending on the number of games or the period until 59 is operated, it may be configured to switch whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect. In this case, as in the fifth modification of the first embodiment, if the number of games is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games or the period is less than or equal to the predetermined period, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled and the number of games is the predetermined number. When the number of games is greater than the number of games or when the period is longer than the predetermined period, the execution of the freeze effect may not be canceled. In addition, according to the number of games or the period from when the execution of the freeze effect is set until the settlement switch 59 is operated, or the number of games or the period from when the execution of the freeze effect is set until the reach eye stops, It may be configured to switch whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect.

(28) In the above-described second embodiment, an operation to stop the reach eye (first stage operation) and an operation of the settlement switch 59 (second stage operation) are required to cancel the freeze effect. , These operations are not limited to the above, and may be operations by the player. However, considering that it is possible to select whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect after grasping the BB winning, etc., the operation of the first step is that the player can recognize or predict the BB winning or its carryover state. It is preferable that it is an operation that triggers the execution of a different effect.

Further, the operation in the first stage and the operation in the second stage do not necessarily have to be different operations, and may be the same operation. In this case, the execution of the freeze effect can be canceled only by repeating the same operation. However, even if the player casually repeats the operation, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, so from the viewpoint of suppressing the unwilling release of the freeze effect for the player, it is preferable to perform a different operation. . In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which three or more steps of operations are required to cancel the freeze effect.

(29) In the above-described second embodiment, the operation of the first step is performed using the stop switches 42-44, but it may be performed without using the stop switches 42-44. In this case, in order to suppress erroneous operations during the game, it is preferable to use operation means other than the stop switches 42 to 44 and the start lever 41. FIG. In addition, the operation using the stop switches 42 to 44 or the start lever 41 may be used for the second stage operation.

(30) In the above-described second embodiment (modification 1), the presence or absence of notification for the release operation is switched according to the number of games or the period from when the execution of the freeze effect is set until the reach eye stops. good too. In this case, if the number of games is less than a predetermined number of games, the release operation notification is not performed, and if the number of games is greater than the predetermined number of games, the release operation notification is performed.

(31) In the second embodiment (Modification 2), the notification for release operation under the condition that the freeze effect is being executed and the notification for release operation under the condition that the freeze effect is not executed. It is good also as composition which changes a mode. In this case, it is possible to provide a game feature in which BB winning (occurrence of freeze) is sensed from the difference in notification mode.

(32) In the third embodiment, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, when a specific reach number stops, the set freeze effect cancellation process is executed, and then set according to the initial setting When the adjustment switch 59 is operated by the execution timing of the freeze effect that has been set, it may be configured to execute the return processing of the freeze effect (reset processing of the freeze effect execution). In this case, in order to match the originally set freeze effect and the reset freeze effect (matching the execution timing and the type of freeze effect), the execution set by the initial setting process is performed during the cancellation process. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which information such as timing is not discarded but held as it is (update processing is continuously executed for information that requires updating such as the freeze counter FC). According to this, when the freeze effect is reset, the freeze effect can be executed while inheriting the initial setting as it is.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, the operation to cancel the freeze effect (operation to stop a specific reach number) and the cancel operation to cancel the release (operation of the adjustment switch 59) are different operations. may be the same operation. In this case, the release of the freeze effect can be canceled simply by repeating the same operation. However, even if the player casually repeats the operation, the cancellation of the freeze effect is canceled, so it is preferable to perform a different operation in order to suppress erroneous operations.

(34) In the fourth embodiment, the fifth freeze effect and the sixth freeze effect are provided, and the freeze effect with different operation modes is provided depending on whether the BB winning or the like is triggered and when the rare role winning is triggered. Although it is configured to execute, it may be configured to execute a freeze effect by the same operation mode.

(35) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the execution of the sixth freeze effect triggered by winning a rare combination is not canceled, but this may be canceled. Specifically, after winning the rare role (after the opportunity for the sixth freeze effect occurs) and before the execution of the sixth freeze effect, a predetermined effect that allows the player to recognize that the BB win etc. is not executed is executed. In this case, the execution of the sixth freeze effect is canceled. Not only when the player recognizes or predicts that he or she will win the BB, etc., but also when he/she recognizes that he/she has not won the BB, etc., it is troublesome if the freeze effect is executed again. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the player from feeling that the freeze effect is annoying.

As a predetermined effect, for example, even though the player performs the stop operation at the timing when the pattern combination corresponding to the BB winning (for example, 7 reds or a predetermined reach number) stops at the effective position, the effective position If reel control is performed so that the above-mentioned pattern combination does not stop immediately, and if the BB winning state or its carryover state is not performed, a predetermined predetermined pattern combination can be stopped at an effective position, while the BB winning state or In the carry-over state, reel control may be performed so that the predetermined symbol combination does not stop at the effective position regardless of the stop operation timing.

(36) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the bonus notification video 201 is displayed, the bonus notification video 202 having a smaller display size is displayed thereafter. However, the bonus notification video 202 may not be displayed. . In other words, when the bonus notification image 201 is displayed, the bonus notification may not be performed in subsequent continuous effects. This is the same when the bonus notification effect is applied to the first to third embodiments.

(37) The configuration of the second embodiment or the third embodiment may be applied to the fourth embodiment. That is, when the adjustment switch 59 is operated after the reach eye stops, the execution of the fifth freeze effect is canceled, or after the reach eye stops, when the adjustment switch 59 is operated, the After the execution of the 5th freeze effect is not canceled and the reach number is stopped, the execution of the 5th freeze effect may be canceled if the adjustment switch 59 is not operated.

(38) In the above-described first embodiment, instead of stopping a specific reach number (executing an operation to stop a specific reach number), the operation of the adjustment switch 59 may cancel the execution of the freeze effect. good. According to this configuration, when the player ends the game, it is possible to prevent the freeze effect set before the end from remaining. For example, if the freeze effect remains, as a result of the freeze effect being executed immediately after the next player starts playing, the player who finished the game notices after the fact that the BB win has been won, and the mood may harm In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the freeze effect is set, when the player operates the checkout switch 59 to end the game, the execution of the freeze effect is automatically canceled. It is possible to suppress the execution of the freeze performance immediately after starting the game. In addition, in the above configuration, the BB winning may be canceled (invalidated) together with the cancellation of the freeze effect.

(39) In the above-described second embodiment (variant 1), the release operation notification (the freeze stock can be released by pressing the checkout switch 59) is not executed during the period in which the medal return process is executed. Alternatively, the number of medals to be paid out when the medal return process is executed may be grasped, and whether or not to execute the release operation notification may be switched based on the grasped result. For example, the number of credits (or the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets) of each game is grasped after the reach number is stopped. Then, when the grasped number of credits is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the main control unit 101 sets a command to execute the release operation notification so that the release operation notification is executed. . On the other hand, when the grasped number of credits is larger than the predetermined number, the command is not set, and the release operation notification is not executed. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the medal return process is executed as a result of the player operating the checkout switch 59 in response to the release operation notification. In addition, in this configuration, if the number of credits is equal to or less than the predetermined number even during the game pause, the release operation notification is executed, and the frequency of execution of the release operation notification can be increased. Conversely, when the grasped number of credits is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 0), the release operation notification is not executed, and when the grasped credit number is greater than the predetermined number, the release operation notification is executed. It may be configured to be It should be noted that each of these configurations can also be applied to the return notification in the third embodiment (press the adjustment switch if you want to cancel the freeze release).

(40) In the above-described second embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period in which the medal return process is not executed, the cancellation flag is turned on and the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. Also when the adjustment switch 59 is operated during the period in which is executed, the execution of the freeze effect may be canceled. In this case, when the payout switch 59 is operated during the period in which the medal return process is executed in a situation where the reach number is stopped after the execution of the freeze effect is set, both the cancellation of the freeze effect and the medal return process are performed. will be executed.

Further, in the above configuration, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, instead of executing both the cancellation of the freeze effect and the medal return process, only the cancellation of the freeze effect may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation in which the freeze effect can be canceled, the freeze effect can be canceled preferentially. According to such a configuration, when the payment switch 59 is operated with the intention of canceling the freeze effect, it is possible to suppress execution of even the medal return process. Further, the freeze effect may not be canceled, and only the medal return process may be executed.

Note that the configuration for executing both the cancellation of the freeze effect and the medal return process or the configuration for prioritizing one of them is the same as the configuration in which the freeze effect is canceled by operating the checkout switch 59 in the first embodiment. In addition, it can be applied to the return operation (cancellation operation of canceling the freeze effect) in the third embodiment.

(41) In the above-described second embodiment, it is also possible to grasp the number of medals to be paid out when the medal return processing is executed, and switch whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect based on the grasped result. good. For example, the number of credits (or the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets) when the reach number is stopped is grasped. Then, when the grasped number of credits is larger than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled. On the other hand, when the grasped number of credits is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to suppress the operation for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect in a situation where medals are paid out. Conversely, if the number of credits ascertained is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 0), the freeze effect may not be released, and if the number of credits ascertained is greater than the predetermined number, the freeze effect may be released. . It should be noted that each of these configurations can also be applied to the case where the freeze effect is canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 in the first embodiment, or to the return operation in the third embodiment.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, the execution of the preset one freeze effect is canceled by the execution of the release operation, but the above release operation is executed without the pre-setting of the freeze effect execution. Execution of the subsequent freeze effect may be canceled (freeze effect may not be executed). In that case, the number of times of the freeze effect that is not executed is not limited to 1, and may be more than one. may be configured so that is not executed.

(43) In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the settlement switch 59 is operated, it may be configured to switch whether or not to execute the freeze effect. For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated for the first time in a situation where the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, and when the second operation is performed, the execution of the freeze effect is restored. It is configured to be released again when operated again.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the freeze effect is set, the freeze effect is executed by operating the settlement switch 59 (if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, the set freeze effect not executed).

(45) In each of the above-described embodiments, a so-called A+ART type slot machine was exemplified as a game machine, but the present invention can be widely applied to a slot machine in which a freeze effect is executed. ) can also be applied to slot machines.

(46) In the freeze effect, the "red 7" pattern combination is temporarily stopped, but it may be configured not to be temporarily stopped, or the pattern combination to be temporarily stopped may be changed.

(47) Although medals are not paid out when a transition combination (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) wins, medals may be paid out.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(49) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result can be given. privilege provision means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
a specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each of the revolving bodies so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed; ,
When a specific opportunity (BB winning or VB winning) occurs, specific game action setting means (main controller 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game after the game in which the specific opportunity occurs function to execute BB winning processing or VB mode winning processing by
When the specific game is executed in a situation where the specific game action setting means is set, a specific game action executing means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for executing the specific game action;
After the execution of the specific game action is set by the specific game action setting means and before the specific game action is executed, the specific game action is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A release means capable of canceling the setting of the specific game operation or the execution of the specific game operation by the means (function for executing freeze release processing and freeze return processing by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, a specific game motion different from the normal motion of each revolving body (normal game motion) is performed. The specific game action can increase the game effect and enhance the effect, but on the other hand, it limits the start or progress of the normal game action, so it can also force the player to be restricted from proceeding with the game for a certain period of time. Become. Therefore, some players may not want to execute the specific game action. In this regard, in this configuration, when the above-mentioned specific opportunity occurs, the execution of the specific game action is set by setting the specific game action to be performed in the specific game after the game in which the specific opportunity occurs. Ensure a time grace period between Then, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during this period, the setting of the specific game motion or the execution of the set specific game motion is cancelled. This makes it possible to play while avoiding execution of the specific game action. On the other hand, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific game action is executed as originally set. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the specific game action while securing the effect of making the game lively by the specific game action.

It should be noted that, in this feature, the ``release means capable of canceling the setting of the specific game motion or the execution of the specific game motion by the specific game motion execution means'' is defined as ``the specific game motion in the specific game is not executed. It can also be expressed as "release means capable of

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the player performs a predetermined operation.

According to the above configuration, since the cancellation condition of the specific game action is established by the player's operation, it becomes possible for the player to change whether or not to execute the specific game action at his/her will.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the player performs a predetermined operation using the stop operation means.

The game machine having the feature A1 advances the game by operating the starting operation means to start the revolving body, and by operating the stop operation means to stop the revolving body. Under such a premise, by setting a configuration in which the cancellation condition for the specific game action is satisfied by a predetermined operation using the stop operation means, the specific game action can be performed without requiring the player to perform an excessively special operation. It is possible to cancel the execution.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined condition is met when a predetermined specific combination of symbols stops at the valid position.

In the above configuration, the specific game action is canceled if the specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, but the specific game action is not canceled if such a pattern combination does not stop. That is, since it is configured to function as a cancellation operation of the specific game action only for a part of the stop operation, it is possible to suppress an erroneous operation of canceling the specific game action even though there is no intention of canceling it, and the player can It is possible to implement cancellation that appropriately reflects the intention of

Further, from the player's point of view, the stoppage of the specific combination of symbols at the valid position serves as a signal for canceling the specific game motion, so the player can determine whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied. In particular, the gaming machine having the feature A1, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured such that a privilege is given or not depending on the pattern combination that stops at the effective position, so the player is highly interested. It is assumed that the player is looking at the stationary picture. By adopting this configuration under such a premise, it is possible to make a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to overlook whether or not the execution of the specific game action has been cancelled.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the specific combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to reach numbers.

For example, it is conceivable that the player's interest in the subsequent performance will decrease due to the detection of the bonus winning. may become In this regard, in this configuration, the gaming machine side determines whether or not the player is likely to recognize the bonus win based on whether or not the ready-to-win numbers stop. And, when it is determined that the player is probably aware of it, it is configured to perform automatic control so as to be able to cancel the execution of the planned specific game action. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress execution of the specific game action in a situation where the player recognizes that the bonus has been won. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach number does not stop and the player does not recognize the winning of the bonus, the specific game operation is executed as initially planned, thereby suitably enhancing the game. can. In other words, while ensuring the effect of making the game lively by the specific game motion, the execution of the motion can be restricted in a situation where the player is likely to find the motion annoying, thereby suitably suppressing the motion from becoming annoying.

In addition, in this configuration, the stop of the reach eye can also be regarded as a release operation for canceling the execution of the specific game operation. In other words, a player who does not want to execute the specific game action can avoid execution of the specific game action by stopping the reach eye. In this case, with the configuration of this feature, the specific game operation is canceled at the same time as the winning of the bonus is recognized, so there is no need to perform a dedicated operation for canceling again, and the troublesomeness associated with the canceling operation is suppressed. becomes possible.

It should be noted that this feature is that "the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), and the pattern combination for transition (BB role or VB winning) corresponding to the specific transition result is placed in the effective position. game state transition means (function for executing winning result correspondence processing by main controller 101) for shifting to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player when the combination of patterns corresponding to the mode) is stopped. , when the lottery result becomes the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the symbol combination for transition stops at the valid position, and the specific symbol combination is the It is different from the pattern combination for transition, and can be stopped when it is in the winning state of the specific transition result or its carryover state, and cannot be stopped when it is not in the winning state of the specific transition result or its carryover state. It is a special pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to the reach number)".

Feature A6. Multiple types of pattern combinations corresponding to reach eyes are set,
The predetermined condition is satisfied when some of the pattern combinations corresponding to the plurality of types of reach eyes stop at the effective positions, and is not satisfied when the other pattern combinations stop at the effective positions. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the game machine is a

In the above configuration, since the reach number that triggers the establishment of the predetermined condition is limited to a part of the reach number, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific game operation from being excessively restricted.

Feature A7. The lottery means performs a lottery for a role,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is that a predetermined combination (such as cherry) is won and a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined combination. can be given and
When the stop operation means is operated in a specific operation mode (first operation mode) in a state in which the predetermined combination is won, the predetermined pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the specific operation mode. When the stop operation means is operated in a different operation mode (second operation mode), the predetermined pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position,
When the stop operation means is operated in the specific operation mode, the part of the pattern combinations cannot be stopped at the effective position, while the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. The game machine according to feature A6, wherein the game machine can be stopped at the effective position when the game machine is stopped.

According to this configuration, the reach number that allows the specific game action to be canceled becomes the reach number that does not stop in the so-called DDT hitting method. In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing a winning combination, the player does not accidentally stop the revolving body while performing the stop operation of each revolving body, but the player consciously stops the reach number. Execution of the specific game operation can be canceled. In other words, since it is assumed that the latter reach number is highly likely to have detected the bonus winning by the player due to the stop of the reach number, execution of the specific game operation can be canceled by stopping such reach number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific game action from being canceled even though the player does not perceive the winning of the bonus.

Feature A8. The specific pattern combination (eleventh replay combination) is stopped at the effective position when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It does not stop at the effective position when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
In a situation where execution of the specific game action is set by the specific game action setting means, a mode notification that allows the player to recognize at least one of the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. The game machine according to any one of features A4 to A7, characterized by comprising mode notification means for executing (notification of pushing order) (function of executing pushing order process by main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, since the operation method for canceling the specific game action or the operation method for avoiding the cancellation is taught, anyone can cancel the specific game state regardless of the skill of the player. be possible. In addition, since the above teaching is performed in a situation where execution of the specific game action is set, it also functions as a notification that conveys the necessity of the release operation to the player who does not want to execute the specific game action. be able to. In other words, in a situation where the player needs to perform a release operation, the method can be notified, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to release the release, and at the same time, suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused because the release method is unknown.

Feature A9. The lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), and a pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result (a pattern combination corresponding to the BB role or VB mode) is placed at the effective position. ) is stopped, a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the elected state of the specific transition result is carried over until the pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
The predetermined condition is an effect that the player can recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carry-over state (a stop of the reach eye, an effect that informs or suggests a bonus win, a premium effect, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is established when the effect of confirming bonus winning is executed.

For example, it is conceivable that the player's interest in the subsequent performance may decrease due to the detection of the winning of the specific transition result. may be restricted and annoyed. In this respect, in this configuration, the player recognizes the winning state, etc., based on whether or not an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict the winning state of the specific transition result or the carry-over state is executed. The game machine side determines whether or not it is so. And, when it is determined that the player is probably aware of it, it is configured to perform automatic control so as to be able to cancel the execution of the planned specific game action. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress execution of the specific game action in a situation where the player recognizes the winning state or the like. On the other hand, when the performance is not executed and it is determined that the player does not recognize the winning state, etc., the specific game operation is executed as initially planned, thereby suitably enhancing the game. be able to. In other words, while ensuring the effect of making the game lively by the specific game motion, the execution of the motion can be restricted in a situation where the player is likely to find the motion annoying, thereby suitably suppressing the motion from becoming annoying. In addition, in this configuration, since the specific game action is canceled at the same time as the specific transition result is detected, there is no need to perform a dedicated operation for canceling again, and it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness associated with the canceling operation. .

Feature A10. When the release is performed by the release means, the release notification execution means (main control device 101 A function to execute the processing of step S3813 by);
grasping means for grasping the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied (function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, steps S3803, and S3812 by the main controller 101);
notification switching means for switching whether or not to execute the cancellation notification by the cancellation notification execution means based on the grasping result of the grasping means (function for executing the process of step S3812 by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

The notification that the specific game action has been canceled serves as a notification that the cancellation operation has been accepted, and is convenient for the player who wishes to cancel the specific game action and has fulfilled the cancellation conditions. Become. However, on the other hand, for the player who accidentally fulfilled the cancellation condition without intending to cancel it, it becomes a notification that the player could not see the specific game action that he should have been able to see. may lead to discouragement. In this regard, in the present configuration, the timing at which the predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is established is grasped, and whether or not to perform the notification is switched based on the result. As a result, it is possible to make the notification after determining whether or not the fulfillment of the cancellation condition is based on the intention of the player. Therefore, while notifying the player who has intentionally canceled the release operation that the cancellation operation has been accepted, the player who has unintentionally canceled the execution of the specific game operation should be restrained from being discouraged. becomes possible.

Feature A11. Characteristic feature A10, characterized in that the grasping means grasps the number of games or a period from when the execution of the specific game action is set by the specific game action setting means until the predetermined condition is satisfied. game machine.

In the above configuration, whether or not to perform the release notification is switched according to the number of games and the period from when the execution of the specific game motion is set until the release condition is satisfied. As a result, after setting the specific game operation, it is possible to quickly switch the release notification based on whether the release condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the release notification depending on whether the fulfillment of the release condition is based on the intention of the player.

Feature A12. The notification switching means, when the establishment timing grasped by the grasping means is before a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting, the cancellation notice is The feature A10 or feature A11, characterized in that when the establishment timing grasped by the grasping means is after the predetermined timing, the cancellation notification is not executed. game machine.

In the above configuration, when the cancellation condition is satisfied immediately after setting the specific game operation, the player who knows that the execution of the specific game operation can be canceled and the method of establishing the cancellation condition has the intention of canceling. It is considered that it has been established by the above, and the notification that the specific game operation has been canceled is executed. On the other hand, if the cancellation condition is satisfied late after setting the specific game action, the player who does not know that the execution of the specific game action can be canceled or how to satisfy the cancellation condition accidentally cancels without intention to cancel. It is assumed that the conditions have been established, and the above notification is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the release is intentional, and to selectively use whether or not to execute the notification.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature A11, the configuration of this feature is changed to "when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is less than a predetermined number of games or less than a predetermined period and if the number of games or the period ascertained by the ascertaining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games or the predetermined period or more, the release notification executing means executes the release notification by the release notification executing means. It is also possible to express that the cancellation notification by is not executed.

Feature A13. grasping means for grasping the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the release means based on the grasp result of the grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific game action is not uniformly canceled when a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is met, but the timing at which the cancellation condition is met is grasped, and whether or not to cancel the specific game action is switched based on the result. As a result, it is possible to perform the cancellation after determining whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied based on the intention of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unintended release for the player.

As for this feature, following the feature A11, the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific game motion is set until the predetermined condition is satisfied may be grasped. Further, following the feature A12, a configuration may be adopted in which the release is executed when the predetermined condition is established early, and the release is not executed when the establishment timing is late.

Feature A14. The lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), and a pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result (a pattern combination corresponding to the BB role or VB mode) is placed at the effective position. ) is stopped, a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the elected state of the specific transition result is carried over until the pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
The predetermined condition is an effect that the player can recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carry-over state (a stop of the reach eye, an effect that informs or suggests a bonus win, a premium effect, etc.) The feature A1 or feature A2 characterized in that it is established when a predetermined operation (operation of the settlement switch 59) is performed by the player after the effect that the bonus winning is confirmed) is executed. game machine.

In the above configuration, when the lottery result is a specific transition result or when the result is carried over, an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict it is executed. Therefore, by watching the effect, the player can internally understand that the specific transition result has been won. After such an effect is executed, a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is established when the player performs a predetermined operation. For this reason, for example, a player who has lost interest in the specific game action and no longer desires to execute the specific game action by sensing that the specific transition result has been won can perform a predetermined operation after the above effect, It is possible to avoid execution of the specific game operation. On the other hand, a player who has a high interest in the specific game action and wants to see the specific game action even after detecting the winning of the specific transition result can cause the specific game action to be performed by not performing the predetermined operation. . In other words, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the specific game action again after ascertaining the winning of the specific transition result.

In addition, in this configuration, the performance and the specific game action that enable the player to grasp the winning of the specific transition result are not alternatives, and both of them can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to respond flexibly to the player's desire to see both.

Feature A15. When the performance is executed or is executed, the operation notification is executed to enable the player to recognize the operation mode of the predetermined operation (the freeze stock can be released by pressing the settlement switch). The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step S4603 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, since the player is taught the necessary operation for canceling, it is possible to cancel execution of the specific game action even if the player does not know the canceling method in advance. In addition, when the above effect is executed, that is, when the specific game action can be canceled, the operation notification is executed, so the situation where the player who does not want to execute the specific game action wants to know how to cancel. and it will be possible to let you know.

Feature A16. a first notification execution means as the operation notification execution means;
and a second notification execution means for executing the operation notification based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition when execution of the specific game operation is not set by the specific game operation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A15, characterized by:

Execution of the notification for operation is convenient for the player who desires to cancel the specific game action, because he or she is notified of what to do when the cancellation operation is required. However, on the other hand, for the player who did not expect from the performance to the execution of the specific game motion or missed the performance, it functions as a prior notice that the specific game motion will be executed. , there is a concern that the attractiveness of the specific game action that invites the player's surprise will be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, since the operation information is executed even when the execution of the specific game operation is not set, the execution of the operation information does not uniquely determine the execution of the specific game operation. As a result, even if the notification for operation is executed at the time of execution of the effect, it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming a prior notification of the specific game operation. In other words, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the cancellation operation while suppressing the deterioration of the performance effect of the specific game action.

In addition, this feature is defined as "an operation notification execution means (by the display control device 81) that executes an operation notification that allows the player to recognize the operation mode of the predetermined operation (the freeze stock can be released by pressing the settlement switch). The function of executing the processing of step S4603), the operation notification execution means is based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition when execution of the specific game action is not set by the specific game action setting means The game machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the operation notification is executed by That is, the second notification execution means is provided without the first notification execution means (when the execution of the specific game operation is set, the operation notification is not executed, and the execution of the specific game operation is not set It is good also as a structure which performs the notification for operation only in a case).

Feature A17. In the operation notification executed by the first notification execution means and the operation notification executed by the second notification execution means, the notification mode of each of the operation notifications is indistinguishable. The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized by:

For example, if the notification mode of each operation notification is different, there is a possibility that the execution of the specific game operation can be detected from the difference, but according to this configuration, the occurrence of such inconveniences is suppressed, and the effect of the feature A16 is achieved. can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the present characteristic "the notification modes of the respective operation notifications are unidentifiable" can also be expressed as "the notification modes of the respective operation notifications are common".

Feature A18. grasping means for grasping the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the release means based on the grasp result of the grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A17, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, instead of uniformly canceling the specific game action when a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is established, the timing of the establishment of the cancellation condition is grasped, and whether or not to execute the specific game action is determined based on the result. switch. As a result, it is possible to perform the cancellation after determining whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied based on the intention of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unintended release for the player.

As for this feature, following the feature A11, the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific game motion is set until the predetermined condition is satisfied may be grasped. Further, following the feature A12, a configuration may be adopted in which the release is executed when the predetermined condition is established early, and the release is not executed when the establishment timing is late.

Feature A19. The predetermined condition includes a first operation by the player (operation to stop the reach number) and a second operation by the player (operation of the settlement switch 59) that is different from the first operation. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that it is established when an operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is satisfied by a plurality of operations, for example, even if the first operation is performed by chance, the execution of the specific game action is not canceled by that alone. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the specific game action is canceled even though the player has no intention of canceling.

Each configuration described in any one of the features A15 to A19 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature A20. The releasing means, after the predetermined condition is established, when the specific condition is established before the execution timing of the specific game operation set by the specific game operation setting means, the specific game operation is executed, and the predetermined The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the specific game operation is not executed when the specific condition is not satisfied before the execution timing after the condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, when execution of the specific game motion is set, the specific game motion is not executed unless the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, a player who does not want to execute the specific game action can cancel execution of the specific game action by satisfying only a predetermined condition among the above conditions. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game motion is executed. Therefore, even if a player who wishes to execute a specific game action accidentally establishes a predetermined condition, the specific game action can be executed by establishing the specific condition. That is, it becomes possible to cancel the release of the specific game motion. As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to recover from an erroneous cancellation operation while enabling cancellation of the specific game motion.

Feature A21. When the specific condition is not satisfied by a predetermined timing before the execution timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the canceling means sets the specific game operation by the specific game operation execution means or the specific game operation. The gaming machine according to feature A20, characterized in that it cancels the execution of .

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is established, the execution of the specific game operation is canceled, and after that, when the specific condition is established, the cancellation is invalidated. Instead of canceling the execution, it is configured to cancel the execution of the specific game operation after waiting for the elapse of a period in which cancellation (invalidation of cancellation) is possible. For example, when a predetermined condition is established, the cancellation processing of the specific game operation is executed once, and when the specific condition is established after that, the cancellation processing and the cancellation processing are executed, respectively. There is a need. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied after a predetermined condition is satisfied, neither the cancellation processing nor the invalidation processing is executed, and it is sufficient to maintain the initial execution setting as it is. Therefore, the processing load required for control processing can be significantly reduced. Also, although cancellation processing is required when a specific condition is not satisfied after a predetermined condition is satisfied, the invalidation processing itself is not executed, so the configuration therefor can be omitted. Therefore, it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

In addition, in a configuration in which the specific game operation is once canceled and the cancellation is invalidated by the establishment of a specific condition, when the cancellation is invalidated (when the specific game operation is restored), the original operation performed by the specific game operation setting means A problem arises as to how to match the settings (execution timing of the specific game operation, etc.), and countermeasures for that need to be taken. In this regard, in this configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and then the specific condition is satisfied, it is only necessary to execute the specific game operation according to the initial setting made by the specific game operation setting means. can be configured.

It should be noted that the present feature is that ``the canceling means does not cancel the execution of the specific game operation when the specific condition is satisfied by a predetermined timing before the execution timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and If the specific condition is not established by a predetermined timing, the execution of the specific game action is cancelled."

Feature A22. The lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), and a pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result (a pattern combination corresponding to the BB role or VB mode) is placed at the effective position. ) is stopped, a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the elected state of the specific transition result is carried over until the pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
The predetermined condition is an effect that the player can recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carry-over state (a stop of the reach eye, an effect that informs or suggests a bonus win, a premium effect, etc.) The gaming machine according to feature A20 or feature A21, characterized in that the effect is established when a bonus winning effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the overlapping implementation of the specific game action and the effect that allows recognition of the specific transition result, and the specific game action is performed while the player is aware of the winning of the specific transition result in advance. You can prevent it from being executed. For example, it is conceivable that interest in the specific game action decreases due to sensing that the specific transition result is won. . In this respect, according to the present configuration, the execution of such an effect satisfies the predetermined condition, and if the specific condition is not satisfied after that, the specific game operation is not executed, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be preferably suppressed. becomes possible. On the other hand, a player who has a high interest in the specific game action and still wants to see the specific game action even after sensing that the specific transition result has been won may find a specific game action by establishing the specific condition after the predetermined condition is met. Actions can be performed. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress unintended release for the player without impairing the convenience for the player who does not want to execute the specific game action.

Feature A23. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a release notification executing means ( function of executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the execution of the cancellation notification can inform the player who wants to cancel execution of the specific game motion that the cancellation operation has been accepted and that subsequent operations are unnecessary. On the other hand, a player who does not want to cancel is notified that it is necessary to satisfy the specific condition, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of canceling the specific game action against the player's will.

Feature A24. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific notification execution means (the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification that the player can recognize that the specific game operation can be executed or the operation for that A gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A23, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, even if the player does not know in advance that the specific game action can be executed and the necessary operation for that, if the player does not want to cancel the specific game action, it is possible to appropriately cancel the cancellation. become. In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature A23, the release notification and the specific notification may be performed simultaneously, or may be performed separately.

Feature A25. When the player performs the first operation (operation to stop the reach eye by the stop switches 42 to 44), the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the player performs the second operation (settlement switch 59) different from the first operation. operation) is performed, the gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A24, further comprising means for establishing the specific condition.

For example, if the operation (first operation) that satisfies the predetermined condition and the operation (second operation) that satisfies the specific condition are the same operation, the player who wants to cancel the execution of the specific game action performs the first operation. If the same operation is repeated because it is unclear whether the game machine accepts the operation when the operation is performed, there may be an inconvenience that the operation intended to be canceled cancels the operation. In this regard, in this configuration, since the two operations are different operations, even if the first operation is repeated, the release is not canceled, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature A26. A plurality of types of specific game actions (first freeze effect to third freeze effect) are set,
The specific game action setting means selects one of the plurality of types of specific game actions and sets the execution thereof when the specific opportunity occurs,
When the specific game action set to be executed by the specific game action setting means is a specific specific game action (third freeze effect) among the plurality of types of specific game actions, the canceling means determines that the predetermined condition Even if is established, means for preventing the setting or execution of the specific specific game operation from being canceled (function for executing freeze release processing by the main control device 101) Features A1 to The gaming machine according to any one of A25.

According to the above configuration, even if the cancellation condition for the specific game motion is met, the execution of some of the specific game motions is not canceled, thereby suppressing excessive restriction on the execution of the specific game motion. can. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution opportunity of the specific game action and secure the significance of providing the specific game action. Also, for example, by making the specific game action that is not subject to cancellation a specific game action that is assumed to be of high interest to the player, even if the player accidentally establishes the cancellation condition, Execution can be guaranteed, and players can be avoided from being greatly disappointed.

Feature A27. The plurality of types of specific game actions include a first specific game action (first freeze effect, second freeze effect) and a second specific game action (third freeze effect) with a lower selection probability than the first specific game action ) and contains
The gaming machine according to feature A26, wherein the specific specific game action is the second specific game action.

In this configuration, it is possible to cancel each specific game action in association with the player's level of interest by making it different depending on the selection probability (occurrence probability) of whether or not to be the object of cancellation. You can separate whether or not As a result, even if a player erroneously establishes a release condition for a specific game action that is assumed to be of high interest to the player, the execution of the action can be guaranteed, and the player will be greatly disappointed. can be avoided.

Feature A28. The lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), and a pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result (a pattern combination corresponding to the BB role or VB mode) is placed at the effective position. ) is stopped, a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the elected state of the specific transition result is carried over until the pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
An informing means for informing that the specific transition result is won when the cancellation is performed by the canceling means in a state of winning of the specific transition result or in a carry-over status of the specific transition result or when the cancellation is performed by the canceling means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A27, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the specific transition result has been won when the specific game action is cancelled. As a result, the execution of the specific game action can be canceled after the player is certainly aware of the specific transition result, and the player is not aware of the above result, but the specific game action can be specified. Cancellation of the execution of the game action can be more preferably suppressed.

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A28, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B19, the features C1 to C23, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E12, and the features F1 to F17 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. A possible privilege granting means (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As the game state, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) which is more advantageous for the player than the first game state. ,
Whether or not a predetermined transition condition (BB win or 4th and 5th regame win) is established when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) Transition determination means (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by main controller 101) for determining whether
When the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is established, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state (winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101) function) and
After the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, when a predetermined condition is established by a predetermined timing before shifting to the second game state (a stop operation to stop the reach eye is performed) ), the first effect execution means (reel control processing by the main controller 101) for executing the first effect (stop display of a specific reach number) that allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred. functions to perform) and
A second effect (freeze effect) which is different from the first effect and which allows the player to recognize that the result of the specific transition is obtained is provided after the predetermined timing and before the transition to the second game state. Second effect execution means to be executed (function to execute rotation effect processing by the main control device 101),
When the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect limiting means (freeze cancellation by the main controller 101) capable of limiting the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means function to execute processing for recovery from freeze) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the first effect and the second effect are set as an effect that allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has been obtained, that is, as a confirmation effect of the specific transition result. By diversifying the fixed effects in this way, the range of effects can be broadened, and the interest can be improved. However, there is a characteristic that the player can grasp the specific transition result if even one fixed performance is performed, and even if such a plurality of performances are performed, some players feel annoyed and the effect of the performance is rather reduced. can become In this regard, in this configuration, after the lottery result becomes the specific transition result, if the predetermined condition is satisfied by the predetermined timing before shifting to the second game state (advantageous state), the first effect is selected as the fixed effect. is executed, and the execution of the second effect is restricted accordingly. This makes it possible to suppress the overlapping implementation of the first effect and the second effect for one winning to the specific transition result.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second effect limiting means does not execute the second effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, when the first effect is executed due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the second effect is not executed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the fixed effect.

Feature B3. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, execution timing setting means for setting the execution timing of the second effect (a function of executing BB winning processing and VB mode winning processing by main control unit 101) ),
The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the predetermined timing is the execution timing set by the execution timing setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, the execution timing of the second effect is set, and the set timing becomes the deadline for allowing the predetermined condition to be established. With such a configuration, while appropriately ensuring the execution period of the second effect when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a grace period for establishing the condition (condition for not executing the second effect). It can be secured for a long period of time.

Feature B4. When the second effect is not executed by the second effect limiting means, the notification execution means executes a predetermined notification (that the freeze stock has been released) that allows the player to recognize that the second effect is not executed. (a function of executing the processing of step S3813 by the main controller 101).

In the above configuration, when there is a possibility that the second effect will be executed but it is not executed, a notification to that effect is executed. As a result, for example, when the second effect is executed in the adjacent game machine but the second effect is not executed in the own game machine, the inconvenience that the player suspects the failure of the game machine is suppressed. be done. In addition, by making the notification, the presence of the second effect can be notified to the player who has satisfied the predetermined condition without knowing the existence of the second effect or the fact that the second effect can be executed. can.

Feature B5. grasping means for grasping the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied (function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, steps S3803, and S3812 by the main controller 101);
Notification switching means (function for executing the process of step S3812 by main controller 101) for switching whether or not to execute the predetermined notification by the notification execution means based on the grasping result of the grasping means;
The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the timing at which the predetermined condition is established is grasped, and based on the result, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to perform the notification after determining whether or not the player knows that the second effect can be disabled and has satisfied the predetermined condition. For example, by adopting a configuration in which the notification is not given to such a player, it is possible to prevent the notification from interfering with the game, while the existence of the second effect, etc., is provided to other players. can let you know. If the predetermined condition is satisfied by satisfying a plurality of conditions, the "timing to satisfy" in this feature can be interpreted as the timing to satisfy the final condition.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the grasping means grasps the number of games or a period from when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result to when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, whether or not to perform the predetermined notification is switched according to the number of games or the period from when the lottery result becomes the specific transition result to when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, after the specific transition result is obtained, the notification can be switched based on whether or not the predetermined condition is established promptly.

Feature B7. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, execution timing setting means for setting the execution timing of the second effect (a function of executing BB winning processing and VB mode winning processing by main control unit 101) ),
The notification switching means is configured such that the establishment timing of the predetermined condition grasped by the grasping means is a specific timing before the execution timing of the second effect set by the execution timing setting means and before the execution timing. If it is after that, the predetermined notification is executed, and if the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied as grasped by the grasping means is earlier than the specific timing, the predetermined notification is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or feature B6, characterized in that

In the above configuration, when the prescribed condition is established late, it is highly likely that the player has established the second effect without knowing the existence of the second effect and that the execution can be canceled, and the prescribed notification is executed. As a result, the existence of the second effect can be appropriately notified to the player who has established it without knowing it. On the other hand, if the predetermined condition is met early, the notification is not executed because there is a high possibility that the predetermined condition was met. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who knew and established the notification from being annoyed by the notification.

When this feature is applied to the above feature B6, the configuration of this feature is changed to "the notification switching means, if the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is a predetermined number of games or more or a predetermined period or more, A predetermined notification is executed, and if the number of games or the period ascertained by the grasping means is less than the predetermined number of games or less than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification is not executed. can also be expressed as

Feature B8. An operation means (settlement switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means.

According to the above configuration, the operation means used when the predetermined condition is established is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means, which are easily touched by the player. It is possible to suppress unintended operation.

Feature B9. The second effect limiting means disallows the second effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the predetermined timing and a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the settlement switch 59 is operated). The game machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the game is executed.

In the above configuration, when both the predetermined condition and the specific condition are met, the second effect is not executed. In this case, a player who is satisfied with only the first effect should satisfy both the predetermined condition and the specific condition. After the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific condition should not be satisfied. Also, a player who wants to see both the first effect and the second effect can execute both fixed effects by satisfying only the predetermined conditions. In other words, according to this configuration, while suppressing the duplication of fixed effects, it is possible to help a player who has mistakenly established a predetermined condition despite wanting to see the second effect, or to perform the first effect. It is possible to meet the demand of the player who wants to see both the second effect and the second effect.

Feature B10. Specific notification execution means (display control) for executing specific notification (the freeze stock can be released by pressing the settlement switch) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the second effect can be prevented when the predetermined condition is established. function of executing the process of step S4603 by the device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation (operation to satisfy the second condition) to prevent the execution of the second effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the fixed effect. become.

Feature B11. The specific condition is established when a specific operation is performed by the player,
Characteristic feature B10, characterized in that the specific notification is notification that the second effect is not executed by performing the specific operation and that the player can recognize the operation mode of the specific operation. game machine.

In the above configuration, since a specific operation for not executing the second effect is notified, the player does not hesitate about the operation, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the duplicate execution of the fixed effect. .

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to feature B10 or feature B11, wherein the configuration does not execute the specific notification when the predetermined condition is not met.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the specific notification becomes an advance notification that the second effect is to be executed, and the specific notification is substantially a fixed effect.

Feature B13. An operation means (settlement switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using the operation means.

According to the above configuration, at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means, which are easily touched by the player. It is possible to prevent a person from unintentionally establishing those conditions.

Feature B14. When the predetermined condition and a specific condition different from the predetermined condition are established by the predetermined timing (when the adjustment switch 59 is operated), the second effect limiting means executes the second effect, The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second effect is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the specific condition is not satisfied by the predetermined timing.

In the above configuration, the second effect is not executed when only the predetermined condition is satisfied by the predetermined timing, and the second effect is executed when both the predetermined condition and the specific condition are satisfied by the predetermined timing. be done. In this case, a player who needs only the first effect may perform the first operation and not the second operation. On the other hand, a player who actually wants to see the second effect but has erroneously established the prescribed condition may establish the specific condition after the prescribed condition is established. Similarly, a player who wants to see both the first effect and the second effect may satisfy both the predetermined condition and the specific condition. In this way, according to this configuration, while suppressing the duplication of the fixed effect, it is possible to help a player who has mistakenly established a predetermined condition despite wanting to see the second effect, or to perform the first effect. It is possible to meet the demand of a player who wants to see both the performance and the second performance.

Feature B15. Specific notification executing means (function for executing the processing of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes specific notification that allows the player to recognize that the second effect is not executed when the predetermined condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature B14, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification notifies the player who has selected execution of the first effect that the second effect will not be executed and that subsequent operations for establishing the specific condition are unnecessary. be able to. On the other hand, a player who wants to see both the first effect and the second effect is notified that the specific condition must be established, and convenience for such a player can be improved. .

Feature B16. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific notification executing means (the processing of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification that the player can recognize the fact that the second effect can be executed or the operation for that A gaming machine according to feature B14 or feature B15, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, even if the player does not know in advance that both the first effect and the second effect can be executed and the necessary operation for that purpose, the necessary operation can be appropriately performed when the player wants to see both the effects. becomes possible to do. Note that when this feature is applied to the feature B15, the notification of the same feature and the notification of the present feature may be performed at the same time, or may be performed separately.

Feature B17. An operation means (settlement switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B14 to B16, wherein at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using the operation means.

According to the above configuration, at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means, which are easily touched by the player. It is possible to prevent a person from unintentionally establishing those conditions.

Feature B18. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the player performs a predetermined operation.

According to the above configuration, by performing a predetermined operation by the player, it is possible to switch which one of the first effect and the second effect is prioritized, so that the player can select the effect that the player wants to see and confirm it. It becomes possible to suppress duplication of production.

Feature B19. The game machine according to feature B18, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation using the stop operation means.

In the gaming machine according to this configuration, the game proceeds by starting the revolving body by operating the starting operation means and stopping the revolving body by operating the stop operation means. Under such a premise, a selection operation can be easily performed while playing a normal game by determining which of the first performance and the second performance is prioritized by a predetermined operation using the stop operation means. Therefore, it is possible to make the configuration easy to perform the selection operation.

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B19, the technical technical It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. A possible privilege granting means (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As the game state, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) which is more advantageous for the player than the first game state. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning), whether or not the predetermined transition condition (BB winning or 4th and 5th replay winning) is established Transition determination means for determining the
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition condition is established, the game state transition means for shifting the game state from the first game state to the second game state. functions to perform) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, it is determined that the specific transition result is obtained in a specific game after the game in which the specific transition result is won and before the second game state. specific effect setting means (function for executing BB winning process or VB mode winning process by main control device 101) for setting so that a specific effect (freeze effect) recognizable by the player is executed;
When the player performs a first operation (stop operation at a timing when the reach number does not stop) in a specific situation in which execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, the specific effect is performed in the specific game. Specific effect executing means for executing the effect (function for executing the rotating effect processing by the main control device 101);
When the player performs a second operation different from the first operation (a stop operation at the timing when the reach number is stopped) in the specific situation, a specific effect restriction capable of limiting the execution of the specific effect Means (function for executing freeze release processing by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific effect is set as the effect when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result. This specific effect enables the player to recognize that a specific transition result has been obtained, and functions as a confirmation effect for the specific transition result. Therefore, the player can perceive internally that the specific transition result has occurred by seeing the fixed effect. However, there are players who perceive that a specific transition result has occurred from other effects or the like and think that there is no need to see the fixed effects again, and it is desirable to meet the demands of such players. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific transition result is obtained in the lottery process, execution of the fixed effect is set by setting the fixed effect to be performed in a specific game after the game in which the result is obtained. A time grace period is secured between the execution and the actual execution. By utilizing this period and executing the second operation within the period, execution of the fixed effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to meet the demand of the player who does not want to see the fixed effect. On the other hand, if the first operation is executed within the above period, the fixed effect is executed as originally set, which is convenient for the player who wants to see the fixed effect. In other words, if each player selects and executes the first operation and the second operation according to his/her taste and state of mind each time, it is possible to change whether or not to execute the fixed effect, which makes it possible for any player. It is possible to realize a game machine that is easy to play.

Feature C2. The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
A specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each revolving body so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed prepared,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the specific effect is the specific game action.

The specific game action can increase the game effect and enhance the effect, but on the other hand, it limits the start or progress of the normal game action, so it can also force the player to be restricted from proceeding with the game for a certain period of time. Become. Therefore, some players may not want to execute the specific game action. By applying the configuration of the feature C1 to such a configuration, the configuration can be made useful for players who do not want to execute the specific game motion.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the specific effect restricting means prevents the specific effect from being executed when the second operation is performed in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, by performing the second operation, it is possible to prevent execution of the fixed effect set in advance, which is useful for players who do not want the fixed effect.

Feature C4. The specific effect executing means executes a first specific effect as the specific effect,
When the second operation is performed in the specific situation, a second specific effect (short freeze effect) that is different from the first specific effect and allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred. A second specific effect executing means for executing
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the second specific effect has a shorter effect period than the first specific effect, or is an effect that can be terminated by the player's operation.

For example, if the configuration is such that the execution of the finalized performance itself is canceled when the second operation is performed, even the player who has accidentally performed the second operation cannot see the finalized performance, and the result of the specific transition is sensed by an erroneous operation. Inconvenience that makes it difficult to Therefore, in this configuration, considering such a player, when the second operation is performed, instead of the initially set fixed effect (first specific effect), the effect period is shorter than that. It is configured to execute another fixed effect (second specific effect). In this case, even for the player who does not want the fixed effect, the troublesomeness is reduced as compared with the case where the first specific effect is performed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to allow a player who has unintentionally performed the second operation to see the fixed effect, and at the same time, consider the player who does not want the fixed effect.

It should be noted that this configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game motion (the effect cannot be ended by the player's will) like the feature C2. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than the specific game action (for example, an image effect that allows the player to intentionally end the effect). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game operation whose effect period (execution period) is shorter than the specific game operation as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second For example, the specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to have a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and the effect ends at the player's will. It may be something that can be made. In addition, this feature is "when the second operation is performed in the specific situation, a specific notification (short freeze effect) that is different from the specific effect and notifies that the specific transition result is won. and the specific notification can be terminated by the player's operation."

Feature C5. An operation determination means for determining whether the first operation or the second operation was performed in one or more predetermined games before the execution timing of the specific effect in the specific situation,
The feature C3 or feature C4, wherein the specific effect restricting means prevents the specific effect from being executed when the operation determining means determines that the second operation is performed. game machine.

In the above configuration, the entire period from when the execution of the specific effect is set to when the effect is executed is not subject to operation monitoring, but only part of the game is subject to operation monitoring. Therefore, the player only needs to select whether or not to perform the second operation in some games. You don't have to worry about This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since only some games are subject to operation monitoring, it is possible to reduce the processing load of control processing.

The present feature may further include a feature that "the specific effect limiting means executes the specific effect when the operation determining means determines that the first operation has been performed."

Feature C6. When the second operation is performed, release notification execution means (step S3813 by main controller 101) capable of executing release notification (freeze stock is released) that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect will not be executed function to execute the processing of
grasping means for grasping the execution timing of the second operation (function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, steps S3803, and S3812 by the main controller 101);
notification switching means for switching whether or not to execute the cancellation notification by the cancellation notification execution means based on the grasping result of the grasping means (function for executing the process of step S3812 by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized by comprising:

The notification of the cancellation of the specific performance serves as a notification of acceptance of the cancellation operation for the player who has performed the second operation with the intention of canceling the specific performance, which is convenient. On the other hand, however, for the player who has accidentally performed the second operation without intending to cancel, it is a notification that the player cannot see the specific effect that he should have been able to see, and the game is played. It can lead to discouragement. In this regard, in this configuration, the execution timing of the second operation is grasped, and whether or not to perform the notification is switched based on the result. As a result, it is possible to make the notification after determining whether or not the execution of the second operation is based on the intention of the player. While restraining, it is possible to notify the player who has intentionally released the release that the release operation has been accepted. Note that when the second operation consists of a plurality of operations, the "execution timing" in this feature can be interpreted as the execution timing of the final operation.

Feature C7. Characteristic feature C6, wherein the grasping means grasps the number of games or a period from when the execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means to when the second operation is executed. game machine.

In the above configuration, whether or not to perform the cancellation notification is switched according to the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set until the second operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to switch the release notification based on whether or not the second operation is performed promptly after the execution of the specific effect is set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute notification according to whether or not the operation is for the purpose of not executing the specific effect.

Feature C8. When the execution timing of the second operation grasped by the grasping means is earlier than a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means, the notification switching means detects the It is characterized in that the release notification is executed, and the release notification is not executed when the execution timing of the second operation ascertained by the grasping means is after the predetermined timing. The gaming machine according to C6 or feature C7.

In the above configuration, when the second operation is performed immediately after setting the specific effect, the player who knows that the execution of the specific effect can be canceled and the method of canceling it can cancel the second operation with the intention of canceling. It is assumed that the operation has been performed, and a notification that the specific effect will not be executed is executed. On the other hand, when the second operation is performed late after setting the specific effect, the player who does not know that the execution of the specific effect can be canceled or how to cancel it accidentally performs the second operation without intending to cancel it. It is regarded as having been done, and the above notification is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the release is intentional, and to selectively use whether or not to execute the notification.

When this feature is applied to the above feature C7, the configuration of this feature is changed to "when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is less than a predetermined number of games or less than a predetermined period of time. and if the number of games or the period ascertained by the ascertaining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games or the predetermined period or more, the release notification executing means executes the release notification by the release notification executing means. It is also possible to express that the cancellation notification by is not executed.

Feature C9. grasping means for grasping execution timing of the second operation;
Any one of the features C3 to C8, wherein the specific effect restricting means includes release switching means for switching whether or not the specific effect is not to be executed based on the grasping result of the grasping means. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the execution timing of the second operation is grasped, and whether the execution of the specific effect is not to be executed or not is determined based on the result, instead of uniformly disabling the execution of the specific effect by executing the second operation. switch. Thus, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific performance after determining whether or not the execution of the second operation is based on the intention of the player, thereby suppressing the occurrence of unintended cancellation for the player. becomes possible.

As for this feature, following the feature C7, the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set to when the second operation is executed may be grasped. Further, following the characteristic C8, a configuration may be adopted in which cancellation is executed when the execution timing of the second operation is early, and cancellation is not executed when the execution timing is late.

Feature C10. When the second operation and the third operation (operation of the settlement switch 59) that is the same as the second operation or different from the second operation (operation of the adjustment switch 59) are performed in the specific situation, the specific effect restricting means The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that the execution of the specific effect is prevented.

In the above configuration, execution of the specific effect is canceled when not only the second operation but also both the second operation and the third operation are executed. As a result, even if the player accidentally performs the second operation, the specific performance is not immediately disabled, and the occurrence of unintended cancellation for the player can be suppressed. . On the other hand, a player who does not want to execute the specific effect can avoid executing the specific effect by executing both the second operation and the third operation.

In addition, in this feature, the third operation may be the first operation. When a player who erroneously performed the second operation corrects it and expresses his/her intention to desire execution of a specific performance, the first operation, which is originally positioned as an operation to desire execution of the specific performance, corrects it. If possible, it can be made easy for the player to understand.

Feature C11. The specific effect executing means executes a first specific effect as the specific effect,
When the second operation or the third operation is performed in the specific situation, a second specific effect that is different from the first specific effect and allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred. Provided with a second specific effect execution means for executing (short freeze effect),
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the second specific effect has a shorter effect period than the first specific effect, or is an effect that can be terminated by the player's operation.

According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature C4. Also, this configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game action (the effect cannot be ended by the player's will) as in the feature C2. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than the specific game action (for example, an image effect that allows the player to intentionally end the effect). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game operation whose effect period (execution period) is shorter than the specific game operation as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second For example, the specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to have a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and the effect can be executed by operating the starting operation means. It may be something that can be terminated.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the second specific effect executing means executes the second specific effect in a game preceding the specific game.

For example, if the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed at the same time, the selection of these effects becomes alternative for the player. At that time, it is conceivable to execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect simultaneously, but there is a risk that the control load will increase and the player will not understand. In this regard, in this configuration, since the first specific effect is performed in the game before the specific game, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed, and the configuration should be convenient for the player who wants to see both effects. can be done.

Feature C13. When the second operation is performed in the specific situation, an operation notification that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect will not be executed if the third operation is performed (so that the freeze stock can be released by pressing the settlement switch) ) (a function of executing the processing of step S4603 by the display control device 81) for executing operation notification execution means (function for executing the processing of step S4603 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the second operation is performed, the player is notified that the specific effect will not be executed if the third operation is performed. As a result, a player who has accidentally performed the second operation without intending to cancel can be careful not to perform the third operation, and the occurrence of unintended cancellation for the player can be suppressed. It becomes possible.

Feature C14. grasping means for grasping execution timing of the third operation;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C13, further comprising release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the specific effect restriction means based on the grasping result of the grasping means. .

In the above configuration, the execution timing of the third operation is grasped, and whether the execution of the specific effect is not to be executed or not is determined based on the result, instead of uniformly disabling the execution of the specific effect by executing the third operation. switch. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific effect after determining whether or not the execution of the second operation and the third operation is based on the intention of the player, thereby preventing the player from canceling the operation unwillingly. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence.

It should be noted that, with respect to this feature, following the above feature C7, the number of games or the period from when the specific effect is set to when the third operation is performed may be grasped. Further, following the feature C8, a configuration may be adopted in which cancellation is executed when the timing of execution of the third operation is early, and cancellation is not executed when the timing of execution of the third operation is late.

Feature C15. The specific effect restricting means performs a third operation different from the second operation before the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means after the second operation is performed in the specific situation. If performed, the specific effect is executed, and if the third operation is not performed before the execution timing after the second operation is performed in the specific situation, the specific effect is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that

In the above configuration, when execution of the specific effect is set, the specific effect is not executed unless the third operation is executed after the execution of the second operation. Therefore, a player who does not want to execute the specific effect can cancel the execution of the specific effect by performing only the second operation among the above operations, and the labor required for the cancellation can be reduced. On the other hand, when the third operation is executed after the second operation is executed, the specific effect is executed. Therefore, even if the player who desires execution of the specific effect accidentally performs the second operation, the specific effect can be executed by performing the third operation. That is, it becomes possible to cancel the release of the specific effect. As described above, according to this configuration, while the release operation is simplified for the player who does not want to execute the specific effect, the player who does not want to execute the specific effect may mistakenly perform the release operation. Even if it is done, it will be possible to seek relief.

Feature C16. After the second operation is performed in the specific situation, the specific effect restricting means performs the third operation by a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means. The gaming machine according to feature C15, further comprising means for canceling the execution of the specific effect (a function of executing the processing of steps S5402 to S5407 by the main control device 101) when the game is not executed.

In the above configuration, when the second operation is performed, the execution of the specific effect is canceled, and after that, when the third operation is performed, the cancellation is invalidated. is not canceled, but the execution of the specific effect is canceled after the elapse of a period in which cancellation (invalidation of cancellation) is possible. For example, when the second operation is performed, the cancellation processing of the specific effect is executed once, and when the third operation is performed after that, the cancellation processing and the cancellation processing are executed. Each must be run. In this respect, in this configuration, when the third operation is performed after the second operation is performed, neither the cancellation processing nor the invalidation processing is performed, and it is sufficient to maintain the initial execution setting as it is. Therefore, the processing load required for control processing can be significantly reduced. Also, although canceling processing is required when the third operation is not performed after the second operation is performed, the invalidation processing itself is not performed, so the configuration therefor can be omitted. Therefore, it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

In addition, in the configuration in which the specific effect is once canceled and the cancellation is invalidated by executing the third operation, when the cancellation is invalidated (when the specific effect is restored), the initial setting made by the specific effect setting means ( A problem arises as to how to match with execution timing of a specific effect, etc.), and measures for that need to be taken. In this regard, in this configuration, when the second operation and the third operation are executed, the specific effect is executed only according to the initial setting made by the specific effect setting means. can be configured.

It should be noted that the present feature is that "the specific effect limiting means, after the second operation is performed in the specific situation, by a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means When the third operation is performed, the execution of the specific effect is not canceled, and when the third operation is not performed by the predetermined timing, the execution of the specific effect is canceled.” can also

Feature C17. The specific effect executing means executes a first specific effect as the specific effect,
When the second operation is performed in the specific situation, a second specific effect (short freeze effect) that is different from the first specific effect and allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred. A second specific effect executing means for executing
The game according to feature C15 or feature C16, wherein the second specific effect is a effect that has a shorter effect period than the first specific effect or can be terminated by the player's operation. machine.

According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature C4. Moreover, this configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game action (the effect cannot be ended by the player's will) as in the feature C2. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than the specific game action (for example, an image effect that allows the player to intentionally end the effect). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game operation whose effect period (execution period) is shorter than the specific game operation as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second For example, the specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to have a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and the effect can be executed by operating the starting operation means. It may be something that can be terminated.

Feature C18. When the second operation is performed in the specific situation, a cancellation that executes a cancellation notification that enables the player to recognize that the cancellation operation for canceling the execution of the specific performance has been performed or that the specific performance will not be executed. The game machine according to any one of features C15 to C17, further comprising notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S5502 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, by executing the cancellation notification, it is possible to inform the player who wants to cancel the execution of the specific effect that the cancellation operation has been accepted and that the subsequent operation is unnecessary. On the other hand, a player who does not want to cancel is notified that it is necessary to perform the third operation, and the inconvenience of canceling the specific game action against the player's will can be suppressed.

Feature C19. When the second operation is performed in the specific situation, specific notification execution means (display control device 81) for executing specific notification that the specific effect can be executed or the player can recognize the operation for that A gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C15 to C18, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S5502 by .

According to the above configuration, even if the player does not know in advance that the specific performance can be executed and the necessary operation for it, it is possible to appropriately cancel the cancellation when the player does not want to cancel the specific performance. . In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature C18, the release notification and the specific notification may be performed at the same time, or may be performed separately.

Feature C20. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C19, wherein the first operation and the second operation are operations using the stop operation means.

The game machine having the above feature C1 advances the game by starting the revolving body by operating the starting operation means and stopping the revolving body by operating the stop operation means. Under this premise, the first operation and the second operation can be performed using the stop operation means, so that it is possible to easily perform these operations while playing the game. It can be configured to be easy to implement.

Feature C21. The gaming machine according to feature C20, wherein the second operation is an operation in which the stop operation timing after each of the revolving bodies starts revolving is different from that of the first operation.

In the above configuration, the first operation and the second operation can be selectively used only by changing the operation timing of the stop operation means, so both the first operation and the second operation can be easily performed.

Feature C22. A plurality of types of specific effects (first freeze effect to third freeze effect) are set,
The specific effect setting means selects one of the plurality of types of specific effects and sets execution thereof when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result. ,
When the specific effect set to be executed by the specific effect setting means is a predetermined specific effect (third freeze effect) among the plurality of types of specific effects, the specific effect limiting means controls the Features C1 to C1 characterized by comprising means for not restricting execution of the specific specific effect even if the second operation is executed (function for executing freeze release processing by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of C21.

According to the above configuration, the execution of a part of the specific effects is not restricted even if the limiting conditions for the specific effects are satisfied, so that the execution of the specific effects can be prevented from being excessively restricted. As a result, it becomes possible to secure the execution opportunity of the specific effect and secure the significance of providing the specific effect. In addition, for example, by setting the specific effect that is not subject to restriction to the specific effect that is assumed to be of high interest to the player, even if the player accidentally establishes the restriction condition, the execution can be performed. This can be guaranteed, and players can be prevented from being greatly disappointed.

Feature C23. The plurality of types of specific effects include a first specific effect (first freeze effect, second freeze effect) and a second specific effect (third freeze effect) with a lower selection probability than the first specific effect. and
The gaming machine according to feature C22, wherein the specific specific effect is the second specific effect.

In this configuration, it is possible to cancel each specific effect in association with the player's level of interest by making a configuration in which whether or not to be subject to restriction is made different according to the selection probability (probability of occurrence). You can separate whether or not As a result, even if the player erroneously performs the second operation with respect to the specific effect assumed to be of high interest to the player, the execution can be guaranteed, and the player will not be greatly disappointed. Avoidable.

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C23, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E12, and features F1 to F17 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. Grantable benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
a specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each of the revolving bodies so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed; ,
When a specific opportunity (BB winning or VB winning) occurs, specific game action setting means (main controller 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game after the game in which the specific opportunity occurs function to execute BB winning processing or VB mode winning processing by
specific operation means (settlement switch 59) for performing a predetermined game end operation (operation for executing medal return processing) by the player;
When the specific operation means is operated in a specific situation in which execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means. Execution determining means (function for executing freeze release processing and freeze recovery processing by main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, a specific game motion different from the normal motion of each revolving body (normal game motion) is performed. The specific game action can increase the game effect and enhance the effect, but on the other hand, it limits the start or progress of the normal game action, so it can also force the player to be restricted from proceeding with the game for a certain period of time. Become. In other words, there are players who like performances and want to see specific game actions, and there are players who want to avoid specific game actions with priority given to game efficiency. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific operation means (the operation means for performing the game end operation) is operated in the specific situation in which the execution of the specific game action is set, whether to execute the set specific game action It is configured to determine whether or not Therefore, if the configuration is such that the specific game action is determined not to be executed by the operation, the player who does not want the specific game action can avoid the execution of the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. . Conversely, if the configuration is such that execution of the specific game action is determined by the above operation, the player who desires the specific game action can see the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. In this way, by operating the specific operation means, it becomes possible to customize the gaming machine according to each player's taste and state of mind each time, and to flexibly respond to the different needs of each player.

Further, the operation of the specific operation means, which is not assumed to be used during the game, is assigned as the operation for determining whether or not to execute the specific game action. For example, if it is a configuration that performs a decision operation by a start operation means or the like, there is a risk that the execution or non-execution of a specific game operation may be switched due to an erroneous operation, but in this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences. become. Furthermore, by using the specific operation means for performing the game ending operation also as the operation means for deciding whether or not to execute the specific game action, the dedicated operation means for the decision operation can be omitted. It is possible to achieve simplification of the configuration.

Feature D2. The execution determining means determines, when the specific operation means is operated during a predetermined specific period (during game execution) of the period in which the specific situation exists, to perform the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the game.

In the above configuration, the determination operation is not valid throughout the period in which the specific situation exists, but is valid only during a part of the period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of determining whether or not to execute the specific game operation due to an erroneous operation.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the specific period is a period during which at least one of the revolving bodies is rotating.

Under the configuration in which the specific operation means for game end also functions as the determination operation means, as a result of the player operating the specific operation means for the purpose of game end, the inconvenience occurs that whether or not to execute the specific game action is determined. is assumed. In this regard, in this configuration, the operation of the specific operation means during game execution is handled as the determination operation. Since it is considered rare for a player who is about to end a game to perform an operation for that purpose during game execution, by adopting this configuration, the player can perform the specific operation with the intention of selecting whether or not to perform the specific game action. When the means is operated, it can be configured to determine whether or not to execute the specific game operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience described above.

Feature D4. The execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means when the specific operation means is operated in a first period as the specific period,
When the specific operation means is operated in a second period different from the first period, end processing execution means (settlement switch by main controller 101) for executing predetermined game end processing (game standby period) A gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3, characterized by comprising a function of executing corresponding processing.

In a configuration in which the specific operation means for ending the game also serves as the operation means for determining whether or not to execute the specific game action, since the target to be operated is the same, mistakes are likely to occur. In this regard, in this configuration, each function is assigned in association with a period, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wrong operations. The present feature may further include a feature that "the end process execution means does not execute the game end process when the specific operation means is operated in the first period." In this case, when the specific operation means is operated with the intention of selecting the presence or absence of the specific game action, it is not only decided whether or not to execute the specific game action, but also the execution of the game ending operation is avoided. it becomes possible to

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the game cannot progress while the game ending process is being executed by the ending process executing means.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is prohibited while the game ending process is being executed, so the game ending process can be appropriately completed. On the other hand, if the player causes the game ending process to be executed without intending to end the game, the game will be forced to be interrupted. Under such a configuration, with the configuration of the feature D4, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game ending process unwilling to the player, and to suppress the player from having an unpleasant feeling.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, wherein the second period is a period during which all of the revolving bodies are stopped.

In the above configuration, a period in which the player has a high probability of quitting the game, ie, a high probability of operating the specific operation means for the purpose of ending the game, is assigned to the second period. Thereby, it is possible to configure such that the game end processing is executed when the player operates the specific operation means for the purpose of ending the game.

Feature D7. When the specific operation means is operated in the first period, the first notification execution means (the function of executing the freeze release processing by the main controller 101) that executes the first notification (freeze stock has been released), a function of executing the processing of steps S4607 and S5506 by the display control device 81;
a second notification executing means for executing a second notification (during settlement) different from the first notification when the specific operation means is operated in the second period;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated during either the first period or the second period, the game machine reacts to it, so that the player can be notified that each operation has been appropriately accepted. can be grasped. Moreover, since the notification differs between the operation during the first period and the operation during the second period, the operation of the specific operation means performed by the player determines whether or not the specific game action is executed in the gaming machine. It is possible for the player to easily grasp which operation has been accepted, whether it is for the determination of .

Feature D8. Information for switching operation that allows the player to recognize that it is possible to switch between execution and non-execution of the specific game action by operating the specific operation means (you can release the freeze stock by pressing the payment switch, I want to cancel the release of the freeze In any of the features D1 to D7, characterized by comprising a switching operation notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4603 and S5502 by the display control device 81) for executing the settlement switch if necessary) The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp that the execution/non-execution of the specific game motion can be switched. As a result, even if the player does not know in advance that such switching is possible, it becomes possible for the player to switch according to his or her taste.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification regardless of whether or not the specific situation exists.

The execution of the notification for the switching operation is convenient for the player who wants to switch the presence or absence of the specific game action, but on the other hand, the player who does not perceive that the execution of the specific game action is set. functions as an advance notification that the specific game action will be executed, and there is a concern that the attractiveness of the specific game action that surprises the player is spoiled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the execution of the specific game action is not set, the switching operation notification is executed, so the execution of the specific game action is not uniquely determined by the execution of the switching operation notification. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification for the switching operation from being a prior notification of the specific game operation.

Feature D10. a termination process execution means for executing a predetermined game termination process when the specific operation means is operated for a predetermined period of time;
The gaming machine according to feature D8 or feature D9, wherein the switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification during a period different from the predetermined period.

When the notification for switching operation is executed, there is a possibility that the player may operate the specific operation means under the influence of the notification. At this time, if the game ending process is executed by the operation, the game is unnecessarily interrupted, which may cause discomfort to the player. In this regard, in this configuration, the switching operation notification is performed during the period in which the game end processing is not performed. In this case, even if the player is tempted by the notification and operates the specific operation means, the game ending process is not executed and the game is not interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

It should be noted that "the switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification in a period different from the predetermined period" of this feature means that "the switching operation notification means performs the switching operation notification during the predetermined period. It can also be expressed as "the switch operation notification is not executed."

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D10, wherein the specific period is a period during which all of the revolving bodies are stopped.

According to the above configuration, when the player ends the game, it is possible to prevent the specific game action set before the end from remaining. For example, if the specific game action remains, the specific game action is executed immediately after the next player starts playing, and as a result, the player who has finished the game has a specific transition result. You may notice and be offended. In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the specific game operation is set by the specific game operation means, when the player operates the specific operation means to end the game, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect. done. At this time, for example, by determining not to execute the specific effect, when the player operates the specific operation means to end the game, the execution of the specific game operation can be automatically canceled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific game action from being executed immediately after the next player starts playing the game, thereby suppressing the offense of the player who has finished the game.

In addition, this feature may further include a feature of "having means for canceling or invalidating the winning state of the specific transition result when the specific operation means is operated in the specific period." In this case, since the winning state of the specific transition result is canceled together with the execution of the specific game operation, it is possible to prevent the game state from shifting to the second game state immediately after the next player starts playing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who has finished the game from noticing after the fact that the specific transition result has occurred and being offended.

Feature D12. The execution determining means determines not to execute the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means when the specific operation means is operated in the specific situation. The game machine according to any one of D1 to D11.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of the specific game action is set, the player who does not want the specific game action can cancel the execution by operating the specific operation means. In other words, it becomes possible to avoid execution of the specific game action according to the intention of the player. In addition, in this feature, "the execution determination means determines that the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means is executed when the specific operation means is not operated in the specific situation". The feature may be further provided.

Feature D13. The execution determination means is characterized in that, when the specific operation means is operated in the specific situation, the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means is decided to be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11.

According to the above configuration, when execution of the specific game action is set, the player who desires the specific game action can execute the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. In addition, in this feature, "the execution determination means determines not to execute the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means when the specific operation means is not operated in the specific situation". Further features may be provided.

Feature D14. When a predetermined condition (stop of reaching eyes) is established in the specific situation, release means (main control device) capable of canceling the execution of the specific game operation set by the specific game operation setting means 101 function to execute freeze recovery processing),
The execution determining means cancels execution of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means by the canceling means when the specific operation means is operated after the predetermined condition is established in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, characterized in that it determines not to be played.

According to the above configuration, when the player who desires the specific game action erroneously satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to cancel the cancellation of the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to help a player who has established the condition for canceling the specific game action by an erroneous operation.

Feature D15. storage storage means (credit function) for storing and storing the number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number as the upper limit;
settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
Payout means capable of paying out at least the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored in the storage storage means (medals by the main controller 101) when the settlement operation means is operated. function to execute return processing) and
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, wherein the specific operation means is the settlement operation means.

According to this configuration, it is possible to realize the configuration described in any one of the features D1 to D14, and it is possible to make it a practically preferable aspect. When this feature is applied to the configuration described in any one of feature D4, feature D5, feature D6, and feature D10, game media are paid out in a number corresponding to the number of virtual game media as the game end processing. become a thing. In this case, it is possible to preferably prevent the game from being forced to stop due to the payout process. In addition, when the aforementioned payout is performed as the game ending process, the stored memory for the number of virtual game media disappears against the player's will, and the player is forced to take the time and effort to reinsert the game media. become. According to this configuration, it is also possible to reduce the trouble of such reinsertion.

Feature D16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. Grantable benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
a specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each of the revolving bodies so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed; ,
When a specific opportunity (BB winning or VB winning) occurs, specific game action setting means (main controller 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game after the game in which the specific opportunity occurs function to execute BB winning processing or VB mode winning processing by
a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) for performing a predetermined game end operation by the player;
When the specific operation means is operated in a specific situation in which execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, switching whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means. Execution switching means (function for executing freeze release processing and freeze recovery processing by main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature D1. Note that each configuration described in any one of features D2 to D15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D16, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features E1 to 12, and features F1 to F17 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. A possible privilege granting means (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
storage storage means (credit function) for storing and storing the number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number as the upper limit;
settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
Payout means capable of paying out at least the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored in the storage storage means (medals by the main controller 101) when the settlement operation means is operated. function to execute return processing) and
a specific effect execution means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that executes a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
When the settlement operation means is operated, after that, for at least one specific effect, a specific effect limiting means capable of limiting the execution of the specific effect (executing the freeze release processing by the main controller 101 function) and
with
The specific effect limiting means includes:
Restriction determination means (function for executing settlement switch corresponding processing by main controller 101) for determining whether or not execution of the specific effect is restricted based on the gaming situation when the settlement operation means is operated;
When it is determined by the restriction determination means that the execution of the specific effect is to be restricted, a restriction execution means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function of executing freeze release processing and freeze return processing by the main control device 101); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific effect by operating the settlement operation means. As a result, a player who does not desire execution of the specific effect can avoid execution of the specific effect. In this case, in this configuration, the operation means for payment, which is originally an operation means for executing the process for payment (the process for paying out the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored and stored), is specified. It is configured to be used also as an operation means for restricting the execution of the production. This eliminates the need to provide dedicated operating means for limiting, and simplifies the configuration. At that time, for example, if the starting operation means or the like is configured to be used also as the operation means for restricting execution, the operation means is used frequently during the game, so that the player who does not want to limit the specific effect may play the game. There is a concern that the restriction operation may be erroneously performed during operation. In this regard, in this configuration, the operating means for settlement, which is expected to be used less frequently during the game, is used. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of erroneously performing the restriction operation during the game, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of unintended execution restrictions for the player.

In addition, in this configuration, if the operating means for settlement is operated, execution of the specific effect is not uniformly restricted, but it is configured to switch whether or not to restrict based on the game situation at the time of operation. For example, in a situation where the settlement process is executed by operating the settlement operation means, the execution is not restricted even if the settlement operation means is operated, so that the player avoids the specific effect. When the operation means for settlement is operated in , it is possible to suppress the overlapping execution of the processing for settlement. In other words, it is possible to switch whether or not the operation means for settlement is to function as the operation means for restricting execution depending on the game situation each time, and it is possible to prompt an operation at a timing suitable for restricting execution.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the game situation is a payout situation of game media by the payout means.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to restrict the execution of the specific effect based on the payout state of the game media by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, in a situation where game media are paid out by the payout means or the number of game media paid out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible not to limit the execution of the specific effect. As a result, when the player operates the payment operation means for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the payment processing.

Feature E3. The restriction determination means is
a first means (a function of executing a settlement switch corresponding process by the main controller 101) for determining whether or not game media are to be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated; ,
Second means for determining whether or not to limit execution of the specific effect based on the determination result of the first means (function for executing freeze release processing by main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific effect can be restricted based on whether or not the game media are to be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, in a situation where a payout is made, even if the operation means for payment is operated, the execution of the specific effect is not restricted, so that when the player operates the operation means for payment for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect , it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the settlement processing.

It should be noted that the ``second means for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific effect based on the determination result of the first means'' of this feature is ``the payout means executes the payout process by the first means. When it is determined that the execution of the specific effect is not restricted, and when the first means determines that the payout means does not execute the payout process, the specific effect is executed. It can also be expressed as "second determination means for determining to limit .

Feature E4. The restriction determination means is
a first means for grasping the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated;
a second means for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific effect based on the grasped result of the first means;
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific effect can be restricted based on the number of game media to be paid out when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, in a situation where the number of payouts is large, even if the operation means for payment is operated, the execution of the specific effect is not restricted, so that when the player operates the operation means for payment for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect A large amount of game media is paid out, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted for a long time.

It should be noted that the ``second means for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific effect based on the grasping result of the first means'' of this feature is ``the number of game media grasped by the first means is If the number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is determined to limit the execution of the specific effect, and if the number of game media grasped by the first means is greater than the predetermined number, the execution of the specific effect is not limited. It can also be expressed as "second means for determining". In this case, the "predetermined number" may be 0, or may be 1 or more.

Feature E5. When the adjustment operation means is operated and the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific effect is restricted, first notification execution means (main controller) for executing the first notification (freeze stock is released) 101 to execute freeze release processing);
Second notification execution means for executing a second notification (during settlement) different from the first notification when the adjustment operation means is operated and the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific effect is not restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized by comprising:

In a configuration in which the settlement operation means is used both for settlement and for restricting execution of a specific performance, when a player operates the settlement operation means, it is unclear which operation is accepted by the game machine, and is confused. Things can happen. In this regard, in this configuration, since different notifications are executed depending on whether the execution of the specific effect is restricted or not, the player can easily grasp which operation has been accepted due to the difference in the notifications. becomes.

In addition, in this feature, the first notification and the second notification may have a part of the notification mode in common. As such a configuration, for example, when both the game medium payout process (settlement process) by the payout means and the execution restriction of the specific effect are performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, the settlement process is performed. The settlement notification (under settlement) that allows the player to recognize that it will be executed, and the restriction notification that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect is restricted (freeze stock has been released) are executed together. On the other hand, when only settlement processing is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, a configuration is assumed in which only settlement notification is performed. In that case, in the former case, the restriction notification only affects the performance, but the settlement notification is related to the profits of the players and the game hall, and the settlement notification is more important than the restriction notification. , and the latter may be set as a more conspicuous notification mode.

Feature E6. Predetermined notification execution means (step by display control device 81) for executing a predetermined notification (pressing the settlement switch can release the freeze stock) when the game situation determines that the restriction determination means restricts the execution of the specific effect function to execute the processing of S4603),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the predetermined notification allows the player to recognize that execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement. .

In the above configuration, since the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement, the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement. Even if the player does not know something in advance, it is possible to appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific performance. However, when the above notification is performed, there is a possibility that the player will operate the settlement operation means immediately after seeing the notification. It is configured to be performed in a game situation. As a result, it is possible to suppress useless operations in situations where restrictions are not enforced.

Feature E7. Predetermined notification execution means (display control) for executing a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means (pressing the settlement switch can release the freeze stock) a function of executing the processing of step S4603 by the device 81),
Any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the predetermined notification executing means executes the predetermined notification in a situation where game media are not paid out by the payout means even if the settlement operation means is operated. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement, the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement. Even if the player does not know something in advance, it is possible to appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific performance. However, if the notification as described above is performed, there is a possibility that the player will operate the adjustment operation means immediately after seeing the notification. The configuration is such that the notification is made in a situation where the medium payout process (settlement process) is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of the operation means for settlement (the operation for the purpose of restricting the execution of the specific effect) under the condition that the game media are paid out by the payout means. Therefore, when the player operates the settlement operation means for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the settlement processing.

Feature E8. Predetermined notification execution means (display control) for executing a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means (pressing the settlement switch can release the freeze stock) a function of executing the processing of step S4603 by the device 81),
The predetermined notification executing means executes the predetermined notification in a situation where the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means is equal to or less than a predetermined number when the settlement operation means is operated. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement, the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement. Even if the player does not know something in advance, it is possible to appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific performance. However, when the above notification is made, there is a possibility that the player will operate the settlement operation means immediately after seeing the notification. It is configured to perform notification. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of the adjustment operation means (the operation for the purpose of restricting the execution of the specific effect) under the situation where a large amount of game media are paid out. Therefore, when the player operates the settlement operation means for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect, it is possible to prevent a large amount of game media from being paid out and the game interruption period to be prolonged.

Feature E9. The restriction execution means, when it is determined by the restriction determination means that the execution of the specific effect is to be restricted, the specific effect is not to be executed. game machine.

In the above configuration, a player who does not desire execution of the specific effect can avoid execution of the specific effect by operating the operation means for settlement. Therefore, the configuration can be made convenient for the player who does not want to execute the specific effect.

Feature E10. The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
A specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each revolving body so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the specific effect is the specific game action.

The specific game action can increase the game effect and enhance the effect, but on the other hand, it limits the start or progress of the normal game action, so it can also force the player to be restricted from proceeding with the game for a certain period of time. Become. Therefore, some players may not want to execute the specific game action. By applying any one of the features E1 to E9 to such a configuration, the configuration can be made useful for players who do not want to execute the specific game motion.

Feature E11. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. A possible privilege granting means (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
storage storage means (credit function) for storing and storing the number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number as the upper limit;
settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
Payout means capable of paying out at least the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored in the storage storage means (medals by the main controller 101) when the settlement operation means is operated. function to execute return processing) and
a specific effect execution means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that executes a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
When the settlement operation means is operated, thereafter, specific effect limiting means (function for executing freeze release processing by main control device 101) for limiting execution of the specific effect for at least one specific effect;
Predetermined notification execution means (display control) for executing a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means (pressing the settlement switch can release the freeze stock) a function of executing the processing of step S4603 by the device 81);
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined notification execution means executes the predetermined notification in a situation in which game media are not paid out by the payout means even if the settlement operation means is operated.

With the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific effect by operating the settlement operation means. As a result, a player who does not desire execution of the specific effect can avoid execution of the specific effect. In this case, in this configuration, the operation means for payment, which is originally an operation means for executing the process for payment (the process for paying out the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored and stored), is specified. It is configured to be used also as an operation means for restricting the execution of the production. This eliminates the need to provide dedicated operating means for limiting, and simplifies the configuration. At that time, for example, if the starting operation means or the like is configured to be used also as the operation means for restricting execution, the operation means is used frequently during the game, so that the player who does not want to limit the specific effect may play the game. There is a concern that the restriction operation may be erroneously performed during operation. In this regard, in this configuration, the operating means for settlement, which is expected to be used less frequently during the game, is used. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of erroneously performing a restriction operation during a game, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of unintended execution restrictions for the player.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement, the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the operation means for settlement. Even if the player does not know something in advance, it is possible to appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific performance. However, if the notification as described above is performed, there is a possibility that the player will operate the adjustment operation means immediately after seeing the notification. The configuration is such that the notification is made in a situation where the medium payout process (settlement process) is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of the operation means for settlement (the operation for the purpose of restricting the execution of the specific effect) under the condition that the game media are paid out by the payout means. Therefore, when the player operates the settlement operation means for the purpose of avoiding the specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the duplicate execution of the settlement processing.

Feature E12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. A possible privilege granting means (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
storage storage means (credit function) for storing and storing the number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number as the upper limit;
settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
Payout means capable of paying out at least the number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored in the storage storage means (medals by the main controller 101) when the settlement operation means is operated. function to execute return processing) and
a specific effect execution means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that executes a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
When the settlement operation means is operated, thereafter, specific effect regulation means capable of regulating the execution of the specific effect for at least one specific effect (executing the freeze release processing by the main controller 101 function) and
with
The specific effect regulation means is
Regulation determination means (function for executing settlement switch corresponding processing by main controller 101) for determining whether or not execution of the specific effect is to be restricted based on the gaming situation when the settlement operation means is operated;
When it is determined by the regulation determination means that the execution of the specific effect is to be regulated, regulation execution means for regulating the execution of the specific effect (a function of executing freeze release processing and freeze return processing by the main control device 101); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature E1. Note that each configuration described in any one of features E2 to E10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E12, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, and features F1 to F17 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result can be given. privilege provision means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
a specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each of the revolving bodies so that a specific game motion (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game motion is restricted is performed; ,
When a specific opportunity occurs, specific game operation execution means (BB winning processing by main control device 101, fifth freeze effect) capable of executing the specific game operation in a specific game after the game in which the specific opportunity occurs function to execute processing and rotation effect processing);
with
As the specific opportunity, a first opportunity corresponding to the first game result (rare role winning) and a second game result (BB winning or VB winning) that is more advantageous for the player than the first game result. have an opportunity,
After the second opportunity occurs and before the specific game action is executed, when the specific effect (stop of reach eye) corresponding to the second game result is executed, the above based on the second opportunity A game machine characterized by comprising an execution restriction means (a function of executing freeze release processing and freeze return processing by the main control device 101) capable of restricting execution of a specific game operation.

In the above configuration, under the configuration that the specific game action is performed based on a plurality of triggers, at least in the case where the result is desired by the player (advantageous second game result), the player can sense the result in advance. If it is assumed that there is, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific game operation. For example, while the player is recognizing or predicting that the second game result will come from the specific effect, if the specific game action is executed overlapping with the specific effect, the player may feel annoyed. According to this configuration, the occurrence of such duplication is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who has previously recognized the second game result, from feeling annoyed by the specific game action, while enhancing the game performance by performing the specific game action.

Feature F2. In the feature F1, characterized in that, in the case of the first game result, the specific effect is not executed during the period from the occurrence of the first opportunity until the specific game operation is executed. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is not executed when the first game result is obtained, when the specific effect is executed, the player can easily recognize the second game result from the effect. As a result, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific game action in a situation where the player is likely to recognize or predict the second game result, and even if the player does not recognize the second game result, Regardless, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific game operation from being restricted.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the specific effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the second game result has been obtained.

With the above configuration, when the specific effect is executed, the player can recognize the second game result from the effect. As a result, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific game action in a situation where the player is likely to recognize the second game result, and the player can specify the second game result even though the player does not recognize the second game result. It becomes possible to suppress the restriction of the execution of the game motion.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the specific effect is that a predetermined specific combination of symbols stops at the effective position.

The gaming machine having the above feature F1, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured such that a privilege is given or not depending on the pattern combination that stops at the effective position, so the player is highly interested. It is assumed that you are looking at a stop picture. Under this premise, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to suppress overlooking of the specific effect, etc., and execute the specific game action while the player does not recognize that it is the second game result. It is possible to suitably suppress the fact that only the restriction is made.

Feature F5. When the specific effect is executed, the specific notification executing means (steps S6601 to S6602 by the display control device 81) for executing the specific notification (bonus notification effect) for informing the player that the second game result has been obtained A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is executed and the execution of the specific game action is restricted, the player is once again notified that the second game result has been reached by the specific notification. In this case, for example, even if the player is unaware of the specific effect or does not recognize the second game result from the specific effect, the player is informed of the second game result by the specific notification. In addition, it is possible to limit the execution of specific game operations. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the execution of the specific game motion from being restricted even though the player does not recognize the second game result.

In addition, in the present feature, the ``specific notification for notifying the player that the second game result has been obtained'' can also be expressed as ``specific notification for notifying the player that the specific effect has been executed''. .

Feature F6. As the game state, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) which is more advantageous for the player than the first game state. ,
Whether or not a predetermined transition condition (BB win or 4th and 5th regame win) is established when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) Transition determination means (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by main controller 101) for determining whether
When the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is established, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state (winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101) function) and
with
the second game result is the specific transition result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the specific effect is a effect that allows the player to recognize that the lottery result of the lottery means has become the specific transition result.

While the player recognizes in advance that it is a specific transition result (for example, bonus winning) and wants to play the second game state (for example, bonus game) as soon as possible, when the specific game operation is executed, the game is started. Progress is restricted, and there is a possibility that the specific game motion may feel troublesome. In this respect, according to the above configuration, since the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific game motion is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the specific transition result from the specific effect from feeling annoyed by the specific game motion.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specific effect is to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the reach number at the effective position.

The gaming machine having the above feature F1, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured such that a privilege is given or not depending on the pattern combination that stops at the effective position, so the player is highly interested. It is assumed that you are looking at a stop picture. Under such a premise, it is highly likely that the player recognizes that the specific game result is the result of the configuration in which the execution of the specific game action is restricted by stopping the pattern combination corresponding to the reach eye. It is possible to restrict the execution of specific game operations in certain situations.

Feature F8. The execution restricting means corresponds to the second game result being different from the specific performance after the first opportunity is generated and before the specific game action is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized by comprising means capable of restricting execution of the specific game action based on the first opportunity when a predetermined effect is executed.

For example, not only when the player recognizes or predicts in advance that the game result is the second game result, but also when the player recognizes in advance that the game result is not the second game result, the specific game action is executed again. If you do, you may feel annoyed. In this regard, in this configuration, since the execution of the specific game action is restricted even in such a case, it is possible to more preferably suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the specific game action.

In addition, in this feature, "the second game result is not obtained" can be expressed as "the second game result is not obtained". This also applies to feature F9 below.

Feature F9. The execution restricting means, after the occurrence of the first opportunity and before the execution of the specific game action, prevents the player from being different from the specific effect and not having the second game result. Any one of features F1 to F7 characterized by comprising means capable of restricting execution of the specific game operation based on the first opportunity when a predetermined effect recognizable by is executed. game machine.

For example, not only when the player recognizes or predicts in advance that the game result is the second game result, but also when the player recognizes in advance that the game result is not the second game result, the specific game action is executed again. If you do, you may feel annoyed. In this regard, in this configuration, since the execution of the specific game action is restricted even in such a case, it is possible to more preferably suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the specific game action.

Feature F10. The specific game action executing means, when the first opportunity occurs as the specific opportunity, while being capable of executing the first specific game action (sixth freeze effect) as the specific game action, the second game action as the specific opportunity When an opportunity occurs, it is possible to execute a second specific game action (fifth freeze effect) different in action mode from the first specific game action as the specific game action,
The execution limiting means limits the execution of the first specific game action when the predetermined effect is executed, and limits the execution of the second specific game action when the specific effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F8 or feature F9, characterized by:

In the above configuration, since the operation mode differs between the first specific game action and the second specific game action, the specific game action is provided with a notification function indicating either the first game result or the second game result. In this case, when the specific game motion is executed, it is assumed that the player will be highly interested in which motion mode the specific game motion will be performed in, and it is possible to further enhance the excitement effect of the game by the specific game motion. On the other hand, a player who is aware of the result in advance may lose interest in the specific game action and may feel annoyed by the specific game action. Since overlapping implementation of the game motion, the specific effect, and the second specific game motion is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the player who has recognized each game result in advance from feeling annoyed by the specific game motion.

Feature F11. Special effect execution means (continuous effect by display control device 81) for executing a special effect (fourth game effect in continuous effect) that allows the player to recognize whether or not the second game result has been achieved in the specific game. function to execute setting processing),
Any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the specific game action executing means is capable of executing the specific game action when the special effect is executed or during execution of the special effect. game machine.

According to the above configuration, a special effect is executed to inform the player whether or not the second game result has been obtained, and the specific game action can be utilized as an element to liven up the effect. In such a configuration, when the specific performance is executed, the execution of the specific game motion is restricted, so the occurrence of the inconvenience that the specific game motion for livening up the performance rather causes annoyance is preferably suppressed. It becomes possible.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the special effect executing means includes means for limiting execution of the special effect when execution of the specific game action is restricted by the execution limiting means.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of the specific game action is restricted, the execution of the special effect is also restricted. It is possible to more preferably suppress the feeling of

By applying the configuration of the feature F5 to this feature, the following effects can be obtained. For example, when the player does not recognize that the game result is the second game result from the specific effect, if the player does not know that the game result is the second game result, and the execution is limited to the special effect, There is a risk that the player will not be able to grasp whether or not it is the second game result. In this respect, the player is appropriately notified of the second game result by making the specific notification, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature F13. Characteristic feature F11, characterized in that said special effect executing means comprises means for not limiting execution of said special effect even if execution of said specific game motion is restricted by said execution limiting means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific game action is restricted, the notification as to whether or not the second game result is obtained by the special effect is executed. Even if the player does not recognize the second game result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp whether the result is the second game result.

Feature F14. The execution restricting means prevents the specific game action based on the second opportunity from being executed when the specific effect is executed after the second opportunity occurs and before the specific game action is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F13, characterized in that it

According to the above configuration, when the specific effect is executed, the specific game action in the specific game is not executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the player who has previously recognized the second game result from feeling annoyed by the specific game action.

Feature F15. The execution restriction means, after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game operation is executed, when the specific effect is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied (operation of the settlement switch 59 is performed), the gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics F1 to F13 is characterized in that the specific game action based on the second opportunity is not executed.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is executed and the predetermined condition is established, the specific game action is not executed. Therefore, the player who wants to prevent the execution of the specific game action by recognizing the second game result from the specific effect may further satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, even if the player recognizes the second game result from the specific effect, the player who still wants to see the specific game action does not have to satisfy the predetermined condition. Thus, according to this configuration, it is possible to entrust to the judgment of the player whether or not the specific game operation is not to be executed, and the specific game operation is disabled according to the degree of interest of each player in the specific game operation. It becomes possible to use properly whether to execute or not.

Feature F16. The execution restriction means, after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game operation is executed, when the specific effect is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied (operation of the settlement switch 59 is performed), the specific game action based on the second opportunity is executed, the specific effect is executed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific game action based on the second opportunity is not executed The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F13, characterized in that it

According to the above configuration, the specific game action can be made non-executable when the specific effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who does not want to execute the specific game action from feeling troublesome with the specific game action by recognizing the second game result from the specific effect. Further, when a specific effect is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game action can be executed. Therefore, a player who wants to see the specific game action even after recognizing the second game result from the specific effect can see the specific game action by establishing a predetermined condition. As described above, according to this configuration, although the specific game action is basically not executed by the execution of the specific effect, the specific game action is executed when the predetermined condition is established as an exception. As a result, the specific game action is performed in accordance with the degree of interest of each player in the specific game action, while suppressing the player who recognizes the second game result from the specific effect from feeling annoyed by the specific game action. It becomes possible to properly use whether or not to not execute.

Feature F17. The first opportunity is an opportunity corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means becoming the first game result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the second trigger is a trigger corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means becoming the second game result.

According to this configuration, each game result is internal, and in terms of the configuration described in any one of the features F1 to F16, it can be a practically preferable mode.

In addition, for each configuration of the features F1 to F17, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group F to each configuration of feature group A to feature group F described in detail above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray for performing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

10... slot machine as game machine, 26L-26R... display window as display section, 32L-32R... reel as revolving body, 41... start lever as starting operation means, 42-44... stop as stop operation means Switches 59: Settlement switch as specific operation means or settlement operation means 81: Display control device 101: Main control device 102: CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position visible through the display unit, a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is given. a possible rewarding means; and
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first game state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result;
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state when the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, a specific effect that allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result is obtained is after the winning game in which the specific transition result is obtained and the second a means for performing a specific setting to be executed before transition to a game state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images